RX680 Service Manual

207
Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Color Inkjet Printer SEMF07008 SERVICE MANUAL

description

Complete Service Manual Epson Stylus Photo RX680

Transcript of RX680 Service Manual

Page 1: RX680 Service Manual

Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690

Color Inkjet Printer

SE ICE MANUAL

RV

SEMF07008

Page 2: RX680 Service Manual

y any means, electronic, mechanical,

EIKO EPSON would greatly appreciate being

r the consequences thereof.

trademarks of their

Notice:All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or bphotocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.

The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.

All effort have been made to ensure the accuracy of the contents of this manual. However, should any errors be detected, Sinformed of them.

The above not withstanding SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION can assume no responsibility for any errors in this manual o

EPSON is a registered trademark of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.

General Notice: Other product names used herein are for identification purpose only and may be trademarks or registeredrespective owners. EPSON disclaims any and all rights in those marks.

Copyright © 2007 SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION. Imaging Products CS, PL & Environmental Management

Page 3: RX680 Service Manual

PRECAUTIONSPrecautionary notations throughout the text are categorized relative to 1) Personal injury and 2) damage to equipment.

DANGER Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in serious or fatal personal injury. Great caution should be exercised in performing procedures preceded by DANGER Headings.

WARNING Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to equipment.

The precautionary measures itemized below should always be observed when performing repair/maintenance procedures.

DANGER1. ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE PRODUCT FROM THE POWER SOURCE AND PERIPHERAL DEVICES PERFORMING ANY MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR

PROCEDURES.2. NO WORK SHOULD BE PERFORMED ON THE UNIT BY PERSONS UNFAMILIAR WITH BASIC SAFETY MEASURES AS DICTATED FOR ALL ELECTRONICS

TECHNICIANS IN THEIR LINE OF WORK.3. WHEN PERFORMING TESTING AS DICTATED WITHIN THIS MANUAL, DO NOT CONNECT THE UNIT TO A POWER SOURCE UNTIL INSTRUCTED TO DO

SO. WHEN THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE MUST BE CONNECTED, USE EXTREME CAUTION IN WORKING ON POWER SUPPLY AND OTHER ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS.

4. WHEN DISASSEMBLING OR ASSEMBLING A PRODUCT, MAKE SURE TO WEAR GLOVES TO AVOID INJURIER FROM METAL PARTS WITH SHARP EDGES.

WARNING1. REPAIRS ON EPSON PRODUCT SHOULD BE PERFORMED ONLY BY AN EPSON CERTIFIED REPAIR TECHNICIAN.2. MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE SOURCE VOLTAGES IS THE SAME AS THE RATED VOLTAGE, LISTED ON THE SERIAL NUMBER/RATING PLATE. IF THE

EPSON PRODUCT HAS A PRIMARY AC RATING DIFFERENT FROM AVAILABLE POWER SOURCE, DO NOT CONNECT IT TO THE POWER SOURCE.3. ALWAYS VERIFY THAT THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED FROM THE POWER SOURCE BEFORE REMOVING OR REPLACING PRINTED

CIRCUIT BOARDS AND/OR INDIVIDUAL CHIPS.4. IN ORDER TO PROTECT SENSITIVE MICROPROCESSORS AND CIRCUITRY, USE STATIC DISCHARGE EQUIPMENT, SUCH AS ANTI-STATIC WRIST

STRAPS, WHEN ACCESSING INTERNAL COMPONENTS.5. REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING COMPONENTS ONLY WITH THOSE COMPONENTS BY THE MANUFACTURE; INTRODUCTION OF SECOND-SOURCE ICs OR

OTHER NON-APPROVED COMPONENTS MAY DAMAGE THE PRODUCT AND VOID ANY APPLICABLE EPSON WARRANTY.6. WHEN USING COMPRESSED AIR PRODUCTS; SUCH AS AIR DUSTER, FOR CLEANING DURING REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE, THE USE OF SUCH

PRODUCTS CONTAINING FLAMMABLE GAS IS PROHIBITED.

Page 4: RX680 Service Manual

Th he printer. The instructions and procedures included her age.

ThCH

CH

CH

CH

CH

CH

AP

Used in this Manual

hout this manual either to provide additional r to warn of possible danger present during a of all symbols when they are used, and always read G messages.

ting or maintenance procedure, practice or condition o keep the product’s quality.

ting or maintenance procedure, practice, or condition observed, could result in damage to, or destruction of,

perating or maintenance procedure, practice or ecessary to accomplish a task efficiently. It may also l information that is related to a specific subject, or esults achieved through a previous action.

ting or maintenance procedure, practice or condition observed, could result in injury or loss of life.

rticular task must be carried out according to a certain ssembly and before re-assembly, otherwise the qual-ents in question may be adversely affected.

About This Manualis manual describes basic functions, theory of electrical and mechanical operations, maintenance and repair procedures of tein are intended for the experienced repair technicians, and attention should be given to the precautions on the preceding p

Manual Configuration

is manual consists of six chapters and Appendix.APTER 1.PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS

Provides a general overview and specifications of the product.APTER 2.OPERATING PRINCIPLES

Describes the theory of electrical and mechanical operations of the product.

APTER 3.TROUBLESHOOTINGDescribes the step-by-step procedures for the troubleshooting.

APTER 4.DISASSEMBLY / ASSEMBLYDescribes the step-by-step procedures for disassembling and assembling the product.

APTER 5.ADJUSTMENTProvides Epson-approved methods for adjustment.

APTER 6.MAINTENANCEProvides preventive maintenance procedures and the lists of Epson-approved lubricants and adhesives required for servicing the product.

PENDIX Provides the following additional information for reference:• Electrical circuit boards schematics

Symbols

Various symbols are used througinformation on a specific topic oprocedure or an action. Be awareNOTE, CAUTION, or WARNIN

Indicates an operathat is necessary t

Indicates an operathat, if not strictlyequipment.

May indicate an ocondition that is nprovide additionacomment on the r

Indicates an operathat, if not strictly

Indicates that a pastandard after disaity of the compon

ADJUSTMENTREQUIRED

CAUTION

CHECKPOINT

WARNING

REASSEMBLY

Page 5: RX680 Service Manual

Revision StatusRevision Date of Issue Description

A August 3, 2007 First Release

B September 28, 2007 [Chapter 5]• "Overview" (Page 168): error correction.

Page 6: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

6

Ch1.11.2

1.31.4

1.5

1.6

1.7

Ch2.1

2.2

.......................................................................... 28

.......................................................................... 28

.......................................................................... 30echanism........................................................ 33

.......................................................................... 45

.......................................................................... 49

.......................................................................... 50inciples ............................................................. 51.......................................................................... 51ts ...................................................................... 52k Diagram ........................................................ 53) / Paper Feed Amount Profile Correction (PFP) 54

TING.......................................................................... 56ors and Sensors................................................. 56.......................................................................... 57.......................................................................... 57.......................................................................... 59ror Indications .................................................. 59no error indications) ......................................... 78Mechanism Problems....................................... 78al Problems ...................................................... 81ply Problems.................................................... 81ted Problems..................................................... 83.......................................................................... 84roblems............................................................. 86

CONTENTSapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONFeatures............................................................................................................... 10Printing Specifications........................................................................................ 111.2.1 Basic Specifications................................................................................. 111.2.2 Ink Cartridge............................................................................................ 111.2.3 Print Mode ............................................................................................... 121.2.4 Supported Paper....................................................................................... 131.2.5 Printing Area ........................................................................................... 16Scanner Specifications........................................................................................ 16General Specifications........................................................................................ 171.4.1 Electrical Specifications .......................................................................... 171.4.2 Safety Approvals (Safety standards/EMI)............................................... 171.4.3 Acoustic Noise......................................................................................... 171.4.4 Durability................................................................................................. 171.4.5 Environmental Conditions....................................................................... 18Interface.............................................................................................................. 181.5.1 USB Interfaces......................................................................................... 181.5.2 Memory Card Slots.................................................................................. 19Control Panel ...................................................................................................... 201.6.1 Operation Buttons & LED....................................................................... 20Specifications of Each Function......................................................................... 211.7.1 Stand-alone Copy Function ..................................................................... 211.7.2 Memory Card Direct Print Function........................................................ 211.7.3 Backup Function...................................................................................... 221.7.4 Camera Direct Print Function (USB Direct Print/PictBridge) ................ 231.7.5 Speciality Print Functions........................................................................ 231.7.6 Setup Mode.............................................................................................. 23

apter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLESOverview ............................................................................................................ 262.1.1 Printer Mechanism................................................................................... 262.1.2 Motors and Sensors ................................................................................. 26Printer Mechanism Operating Principles............................................................ 28

2.2.1 Printhead........................2.2.2 Carriage Mechanism......2.2.3 APG Mechanism ...........2.2.4 Paper Loading/Feeding M2.2.5 CD-R Mechanism..........2.2.6 Ink System.....................2.2.7 Scanner Unit ..................

2.3 Electrical Circuits Operating Pr2.3.1 Features .........................2.3.2 Circuit Board Componen2.3.3 Main Board Circuit Bloc

2.4 Banding Reduction System (BRS

Chapter 3 TROUBLESHOO3.1 Overview ..................................

3.1.1 Troubleshooting on Mot3.2 Error/Warning Indications........

3.2.1 List of Error Indications3.3 Troubleshooting........................

3.3.1 Troubleshooting with Er3.4 Troubleshooting by Symptom (

3.4.1 Troubleshooting Printer 3.4.2 Troubleshooting Electric3.4.3 Troubleshooting Ink Sup3.4.4 Troubleshooting I/F-rela

3.5 Troubleshooting for Scanner ....3.6 Troubleshooting Duplex Unit P

Page 7: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

7

Ch4.1

4.2

4.3

4.4

4.5

........................................................................ 129

........................................................................ 130....................................................................... 133

ensor ............................................................... 134 Lever ............................................................ 135

nsor/RP Sensor ............................................... 137....................................................................... 139

........................................................................ 142

........................................................................ 143

........................................................................ 144J Roller Assy/PF Roller Assy......................... 145....................................................................... 149

sy..................................................................... 150

...................................................................... 152m List ............................................................ 152........................................................................ 155nt Program ..................................................... 157

(Rear/Front) ................................................... 157nt..................................................................... 157........................................................................ 158tment (Front/Rear) .......................................... 159........................................................................ 159ont) .................................................................. 160stment Program ............................................. 161........................................................................ 161ent ................................................................. 163ent................................................................. 164

........................................................................ 165S) Adjustment / Paper Feed Amount Profile (PFP) ........................................................................ 168........................................................................ 168........................................................................ 170

apter 4 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLYOverview ............................................................................................................ 884.1.1 Precautions .............................................................................................. 884.1.2 Tools ........................................................................................................ 894.1.3 Screws...................................................................................................... 894.1.4 Work Completion Checklist .................................................................... 904.1.5 Required Preparation before Disassembly .............................................. 914.1.6 Orientation Definition ............................................................................. 914.1.7 How to Unlock the Carriage.................................................................... 914.1.8 Disassembly Flowchart ........................................................................... 92Removing Exterior Parts/Components ............................................................... 944.2.1 Paper Support Assy ................................................................................. 944.2.2 Rear Cover/Automatic Duplex Unit ........................................................ 944.2.3 Cassette Assy........................................................................................... 954.2.4 Front ASF Cover Assy ............................................................................ 964.2.5 Panel Unit/Upper Housing ...................................................................... 964.2.6 Scanner Unit .......................................................................................... 1004.2.7 Hinge Assy ............................................................................................ 102Disassembling the Scanner Unit....................................................................... 1034.3.1 Document Cover/ASF Cover ................................................................ 1034.3.2 Scanner Housing.................................................................................... 1034.3.3 CIS Unit................................................................................................. 1044.3.4 CR Motor Unit....................................................................................... 105Removing Control Boards................................................................................ 1064.4.1 Main Board Assy ................................................................................... 1064.4.2 Disassembling the Main Board Assy .................................................... 1074.4.3 Disassembling the Panel Unit................................................................ 108Disassembling the Major Parts/Components.................................................... 1104.5.1 Middle Housing ..................................................................................... 1104.5.2 Power Supply Unit ................................................................................ 1134.5.3 Stacker Assy .......................................................................................... 1144.5.4 Printer Mechanism................................................................................. 1144.5.5 CR Scale ................................................................................................ 1174.5.6 Printhead................................................................................................ 1184.5.7 APG Assy/Sub Board/ASF Encoder/Retard ASF Assy ........................ 1204.5.8 Waste Ink Pads/Foot.............................................................................. 1234.5.9 EJ Frame Assy/CDR Guide Assy.......................................................... 1244.5.10 PF Encoder .......................................................................................... 1274.5.11 PF Motor.............................................................................................. 128

4.5.12 CR Motor.....................4.5.13 Carriage Assy ..............4.5.14 Paper Guide Upper L/R4.5.15 Paper Guide Rear/PE S4.5.16 Rear ASF Assy/Change4.5.17 ASF Sub Motor/RH Se4.5.18 LD roller/Retard Roller4.5.19 Ink System...................4.5.20 ASF Motor Assy..........4.5.21 Rear Frame Assy .........4.5.22 Paper Guide Front & E4.5.23 Paper Guide Bank Assy4.5.24 Paper Guide Lower As

Chapter 5 ADJUSTMENT5.1 Adjustment Items and Overview

5.1.1 Servicing Adjustment Ite5.1.2 Required Adjustments ...

5.2 Adjustment by Using Adjustme5.2.1 Top Margin Adjustment5.2.2 Head Angular Adjustme5.2.3 Bi-D Adjustment ...........5.2.4 First Dot Position Adjus5.2.5 PW Adjustment .............5.2.6 PF Adjustment (Rear/Fr

5.3 Adjustment without Using Adju5.3.1 PG Adjustment ..............5.3.2 PF Belt Tension Adjustm5.3.3 FD Belt Tension Adjustm

5.4 Scanner Original Adjustment ...5.5 Banding Reduction System (BR

Correction .................................5.5.1 Overview .......................5.5.2 Adjustment Procedure ...

Page 8: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

8

Ch6.1

Ch7.17.27.3

apter 6 MAINTENANCEOverview .......................................................................................................... 1746.1.1 Cleaning................................................................................................. 1746.1.2 Service Maintenance ............................................................................. 1746.1.3 Lubrication ............................................................................................ 175

apter 7 APPENDIXConnectors ........................................................................................................ 184Exploded Diagram / Parts List ......................................................................... 188Electrical Circuits ............................................................................................. 188

Page 9: RX680 Service Manual

C H A P T E R A

1PR CT DESCRIPTION

ODU
Page 10: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

P 10

1.StyforTh

2 mm (D) x 237 mm (H) closed. Excludes the duplex unit)

DR tray, duplex unit and power cable)

. External View

RODUCT DESCRIPTION Features

1 Featureslus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 are multi-featured color inkjet printers designed semiprofessional and home use. e main features are;

Printing

High speed and high quality on plain paper is achieved. Newly developed dye ink is employed, which offers excellent resistance to light, water, gas, and is less prone to smear.• In addition to print from a PC, offers direct print from a memory card.• Automatic duplex printing using the optional duplex unit (equipped as

standard for EAI model)• Direct print on a CD/DVD• Equipped with two paper feeders; front cassette and rear ASF.

Scanning

Employing CIS sensor offers faster scanning with no warm-up time and achieved compact body.• Scanning from a PC• Offers a function that directly stores a scan data to a memory card.

Stand-alone copy

High quality copy using the printing and scanning functions. Offers eight or 11 (with the duplex unit) preset copy layouts.Memory card slot

Accessible from a PC as a USB memory card slot.Color LCD

2.5-inch TFT color LCD for excellent ease of operationUSB interfaces• Enables to print images in an external storage device.• Backup copy of a memory card can be made on an external media• Offers camera direct print (PictBridge, USB Direct Print)

Wireless communication

Mounting the optional Bluetooth unit offers wireless communication with an external device.

Dimensions

Dimensions:446 mm (W) x 43(with the ASF and stacker

Weight: 12.0 kg (Excludes ink cartridges, C

Figure 1-1

Page 11: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

P 11

1.

1.rtridges for this printer are shown below.

nopened), six months after opening package.

(H)

Pr

N

Pr

Pr

C

In

In

Pa

Pa

Pa

PF

t No. of Ink Cartridges

Euro Asia, CISMEA

T0801 T0811 (S) T0821 (SS)

T0802 T0812 (S) T0822 (SS)

T0803 T0813 (S) T0823 (SS)

T0804 T0814 (S) T0824 (SS)

T0805 T0815 (S) T0825 (SS)

T0806 T0816 (S) T0826 (SS)

rage Temperaturege Temperature Limit

0 oC to 40 oC4oF to 104oF) 1 month max. at 40 oC

(104oF)0 oC to 40 oC4oF to 104oF)

cartridges.rtridge freezes at -16 °C (3.2 oF). It takes der 25 °C (77oF) until the ink thaws and

RODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications

2 Printing Specifications

2.1 Basic Specifications

1.2.2 Ink Cartridge The product numbers of the Epson ink ca

Shelf life

Two years from production date (if u

Storage Temperature

Dimension

12.7 mm (W) x 68 mm (D) x 47 mm

Table 1-1. Printer Specifications

Item Specifications

int method On-demand ink jet

ozzle configurationBlack: 90 nozzles x 1 Color: 90 nozzles x 5

(Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Light Cyan, Light Magenta)

int direction Bi-directional minimum distance printing (logic seeking)

int resolution

Horizontal x Vertical (dpi)

• 360 x 180• 360 x 360• 720 x 360

• 720 x 540• 720 x 720• SMGA 5760 x 1440 (1440 x 1440)

ontrol code• ESC/P Raster command• ESC/P-R (RGB) command• EPSON Remote command

ternal font

Character code: Alphanumeric with expanded graphics (PC437) ASCII, 20H to 7FH only

Font: EPSON original font Alphanumeric font: Courier

put buffer size 64 Kbytes

per feed method Friction feed

per path • Top feed, front out (front paper cassette) • Front feed, front out (rear ASF)

per feed rates T.B.D. mm/sec (at 25.4 mm feed)

interval Programmable in 0.01764 mm (1/1440 inch) steps

Table 1-2. Produc

Color EAI

Black T0771 (S) T0781 (SS)

Cyan T0772 (S) T0782 (SS)

Magenta T0773 (S) T0783 (SS)

Yellow T0774 (S) T0784 (SS)

Light Cyan T0775 (S) T0785 (SS)

Light Magenta T0776 (S) T0786 (SS)

Table 1-3. StoSituation Stora

When stored in individual boxes -2(-

When installed in main unit-2(-

CAUTION Do not use expired inkThe ink in the ink caabout three hours unbecomes usable.

Page 12: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

P 12

1.

ss depending on the paper size.

10”, Letter, A4

••

0x7200 pass)

MC2-2(280cps) ON ON NA

0x360 MC2-1(360cps) OFF OFF NA

0x720 MC1-1(240cps) OFF ON NA

0x7200 pass)

MC2-2(280cps) ON ON NA

0x720 MC1-1(240cps) OFF ON NA

0x1440 MC1-5(200cps) ON ON NA

0x1440 MC1-5(200cps) ON ON NA

de (Color/Monochrome)solutionx V) dpi

Dot Size(cps*1) Bi-d Micro

WeaveBorder-less

RODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications

2.3 Print Mode

Note *1: cps = character per second*2 : Photo mode uses 1.0 pass or 2.0 pa

1.0 pass supported size: 4”x6” 2.0 pass supported size: 5”x7”, 8”x

Table 1-4. Print Mode (Color/Monochrome)

Media Print Mode Resolution(H x V) dpi

Dot Size(cps*1) Bi-d Micro

WeaveBorder-less

Plain paperPremium Bright White Paper (EAI)Bright White Inkjet Paper (others)

Draft 1(Fast economy)

360x180 Eco (450cps) ON OFF NA

Draft 2(Economy)

360x180 Eco (450cps) ON OFF NA

Normal 360x360 MC2-1(360cps) ON OFF NA

Photo Fine 720x720 MC1-1(240cps) ON ON NA

Ultra Premium Glossy Photo Paper (EAI)Ultra Glossy Photo Paper (others)

Photo*2 720x720(1.0 pass)

MC1-2(240cps) ON ON OK

Photo*2 720x720(2.0 pass)

MC2-2(280cps) ON ON OK

Super Photo 1440x1440 MC1-5(200cps) ON ON OK

Photo Paper Glossy (EAI)Glossy Photo Paper (others)Premium Photo Paper Glossy (EAI)Premium Glossy Photo Paper (others)Premium Photo Paper Semi-Gloss (EAI)Premium Semigloss Photo Paper (other)

Fine 720x360 MC1-1(240cps) ON ON OK

Photo*2 720x720(1.0 pass)

MC1-2(240cps) ON ON OK

Photo*2 720x720(2.0 pass)

MC2-2(280cps) ON ON OK

Super Photo 1440x1440 MC1-5(200cps) ON ON OK

Premium Presentation Paper Matte (EAI)Matte Paper Heavy-weight (others)

Photo 720x720(2.0 pass)

MC2-2(280cps) ON ON OK

Super Photo 1440x1440 MC1-5(200cps) ON ON OK

• Presentation Paper Matte (EAI)

• Photo Quality Inkjet Paper (others)

Photo 72(2.

EnvelopeNormal 36

Photo Fine 72

Photo stickers Photo 72(2.

• Iron-On Transfer Paper (EAI)

• Iron-On Cool Peal Transfer Paper (others)

Photo Fine 72

CD/DVD label Super Photo 144

High-quality CD/DVD label Super Photo 144

Table 1-4. Print Mo

Media Print Mode Re(H

Page 13: RX680 Service Manual

E Revision B

P 13

1Th tions (between EAI, EUR, and Asia).

EUR Asia Paper Path

B*2 D*3 P*1 B*2 D*3 F*4 R*5

P

- - Y - - - Y

- Y Y - Y Y Y

- Y Y - Y Y Y

- Y Y - Y Y Y

- - Y - - Y Y

- - - - - - -

- - Y - - Y Y

- - Y - - Y*6 Y*7

P - Y Y - Y Y Y

P - - - - - Y Y

B - Y Y - Y Y Y

UU

- - - - - Y Y

Y - Y Y - Y Y

- - - - - Y Y

Y - - - - Y Y

Y - Y Y - Y Y

No is available or not. (rear ASF). r the front feeder, and *7 indicates that for the rear.

PSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690

RODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications

.2.4 Supported Papere table below lists the paper type and sizes supported by the printer. The Supported paper type and sizes vary depending on destina

Table 1-5. Supported Paper

Paper Name Paper SizeThickne

ss Weight EAI

mm g/m2 lb. P*1 B*2 D*3 P*1

lain paper

Legal 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5”x14”)

0.08-0.11 64-90 17-24

Y - - Y

Letter 215.9 x 279.4 mm (8.5”x11”) Y - Y Y

A4 210 x 297 mm (8.3”x11.7”) Y - Y Y

B5 182 x 257 mm (7.2”x10.1”) - - Y Y

A5 148 x 210 mm (5.8”x8.3”) - - - Y

Half Letter 139.7 x 215.9 mm (5.5"x8.5”) Y - - -

A6 105 x 148 mm (4.1”x5.8”) Y - - Y

User Defined

89 x 127- 216 x 297 mm*6

50.8x127 - 216x1117.9 mm*7 Y - - Y

remium Inkjet Plain Paper A4 210 x 297 mm (8.3”x11.7”) 0.11 80 21 - - - Y

remium Bright White Paper (EAI) Letter 215.9 x 279.4 mm (8.5”x11”) 0.11 90 24 Y - Y -

right White Inkjet Paper (others) A4 210 x 297 mm (8.3”x11.7”) 0.13 92.5 25 - - - Y

ltra Premium Photo Paper Glossy (EAI) ltra Glossy Photo Paper (others)

Letter 215.9 x 279.4 mm (8.5”x11”)

0.30 290 77

Y Y - -

A4 210 x 297 mm (8.3”x11.7”) - - - Y

8” x 10” 203.2 x 254 mm Y Y - -

5” x 7” 127 x 178 mm Y Y - Y

4” x 6” 101.6 x 152.4 mm Y Y - Y

te *:*1: indicates whether the paper type/size is supported or not. *2: indicates whether Borderless printing is available or not. *3: indicates whether duplex printing*4: indicates whether the paper type/size is supported for front feeding (front cassette). *5: indicates whether the paper type/size is supported for rear feeding The underlined “Y” indicates the default feeder. *6,*7: the available user defined size differs between the front and the rear feeders. *6 indicates the value fo

Page 14: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

P 14

PrPr

- - - - - Y Y

Y - Y Y - Y Y

- - - - - Y Y

Y - Y Y - Y Y

Y - Y Y - Y Y

- - - - - Y Y

PhG

- - - - - Y Y

Y - Y Y - Y Y

Y - - - - Y Y

Y - Y Y - Y Y

PrPr

- - - - - - -

Y - Y Y - Y Y

Y - Y Y - Y Y

U - - - - - Y Y

PrM

- - - - - Y Y

Y - Y Y - Y Y

- - - - - Y Y

D- - - - - Y Y

- - Y - - Y Y

PrPh

- - - - - Y Y

- - Y - - Y Y

EUR Asia Paper Path

B*2 D*3 P*1 B*2 D*3 F*4 R*5

No is available or not. (rear ASF).

RODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications

emium Photo Paper Glossy (EAI) emium Glossy Photo Paper (others)

Letter 215.9 x 279.4 mm (8.5”x11”)

0.27 255 68

Y Y - -

A4 210 x 297 mm (8.3”x11.7”) Y Y - Y

8” x 10” 203.2 x 254 mm Y Y - -

5” x 7” 127 x 178 mm Y Y - Y

4" x 6" 101.6 x 152.4 mm Y Y - Y

16:9 wide 102 x 181 mm (4”x7.11”) - - - Y

oto Paper Glossy (EAI) lossy Photo Paper (others)

Letter 215.9 x 279.4 mm (8.5”x11”)

0.25 258 68

Y Y - -

A4 210 x 297 mm (8.3”x11.7”) Y Y - Y

5” x 7” 127 x 178 mm - - - Y

4” x 6” 101.6 x 152.4 mm Y Y - Y

emium Photo Paper Semi-gloss (EAI) emium Semigloss Photo Paper (others)

Letter 215.9 x 279.4 mm (8.5”x11”)

0.27 250 66

Y Y - -

A4 210 x 297 mm (8.3”x11.7”) - - - Y

4” x 6” 101.6 x 152.4 mm Y Y - Y

ltra Premium Photo Paper Luster Letter 215.9 x 279.4 mm (8.5”x11”) 0.27 250 66 Y Y - -

emium Presentation Paper Matte (EAI)atte Paper Heavy-weight (others)

Letter 215.9 x 279.4 mm (8.5”x11”)

0.23 167 44

Y Y - -

A4 210 x 297 mm (8.3”x11.7”) - - - Y

8” x 10” 203.2 x 254 mm Y Y - -

ouble-sided Matte PaperLetter 215.9 x 279.4 mm (8.5”x11”)

0.22 185 49Y - - -

A4 210 x 297 mm (8.3”x11.7”) - - - Y

esentation Paper Matte (EAI) oto Quality Inkjet Paper (others)

Letter 215.9 x 279.4 mm (8.5”x11”)0.12 102 27

Y - - -

A4 210 x 297 mm (8.3”x11.7”) Y - - Y

Table 1-5. Supported Paper

Paper Name Paper SizeThickne

ss Weight EAI

mm g/m2 lb. P*1 B*2 D*3 P*1

te *:*1: indicates whether the paper type/size is supported or not. *2: indicates whether Borderless printing is available or not. *3: indicates whether duplex printing*4: indicates whether the paper type/size is supported for front feeding (front cassette). *5: indicates whether the paper type/size is supported for rear feeding The underlined “Y” indicates the default feeder.

Page 15: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

P 15

En

- - Y - - - -

- - Y - - - -

- - Y - - - -

IroIro

- - - - - - Y

- - Y - - - Y

Ph - - Y - - - Y

Ph - - Y - - - Y

CCD

- - Y - - Y*8 -

- - Y - - Y*8 -

C

EUR Asia Paper Path

B*2 D*3 P*1 B*2 D*3 F*4 R*5

Not is available or not. rear ASF).

RODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications

velopes

#10 104.8 x 241.3 mm (4.125”x9.5”)

- 75-90 20-24

Y - - Y

#DL 110 x 220 mm - - - Y

#C6 114 x 162 mm - - - Y

n-On Transfer Paper (EAI)n-On Cool Peal Transfer Paper (others)

Letter 215.9 x 279.4 mm (8.5”x11”)0.14 130 35

Y - - -

A4 210 x 297 mm (8.3”x11.7”) - - - Y

oto Stickers 16 A6 105 x 148 mm (4.1”x5.8”) 0.19 - - - - -

oto Stickers 4 A6 105 x 148 mm (4.1”x5.8”) 0.19 - - - - -

D/DVD /DVD Premium Surface

ø12cm ø12cm - - Y - - Y

ø8cm ø8cm - - Y - - Y

AUTION Make sure the paper is not wrinkled, fluffed, torn, or folded.The curve of paper must be 5 mm or below.When printing on an envelope, be sure the flap is folded neatly. Do not use the adhesive envelopes.Do not use double envelopes and cellophane window envelopes.

Table 1-5. Supported Paper

Paper Name Paper SizeThickne

ss Weight EAI

mm g/m2 lb. P*1 B*2 D*3 P*1

e *:*1: indicates whether the paper type/size is supported or not. *2: indicates whether Borderless printing is available or not. *3: indicates whether duplex printing*4: indicates whether the paper type/size is supported for front feeding (front cassette). *5: indicates whether the paper type/size is supported for rear feeding ( The underlined “Y” indicates the default feeder. *8: using the CD/DVD tray.

Page 16: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

P 16

1.Th

No

ns

Scanning Range

P

St

Bpr

Pa

nner SpecificationsSpecification

ge, stationary document

4 size

es (216 x 297 mm)

00 dpi / Sub scan: 2400 dpi

0 pixels (1200dpi)

l (input), 1 or 8 bit per pixel (output)

Scanning Range

RL (read length) OTM (top margin)

297 mm (11.7”) 1.5 mm +/- 1 mm

a

L

tion

Scanning range

Scan bed

Original(face down)

Scanning direction

RODUCT DESCRIPTION Scanner Specifications

2.5 Printing Areae printing area for this printer is shown below.

te* : The margins for Borderless print are margins that bleed off the edges of paper.

Figure 1-2. Printing Area

1.3 Scanner Specificatio

SCANNING RANGE

Figure 1-3.

Table 1-6. Printing Area (Margins)

rint Mode Paper SizeMargin

Left Right Top Bottom

andard printAny size 3 mm 3 mm 3 mm 3 mm

Envelope 5 mm 5 mm 3 mm 20 mm

orderless int

A4/Letter to 5” x 7”2.54 mm* 2.54 mm*

2.96 mm* 4.02 mm*

4” x 6” 1.34 mm* 2.54 mm*

Print Area

LM RM

TM

BM

BM

Cut Sheet (Standard) Cut Sheet (Borderless)

Paper SIze

LM RM

TM

BM

Print Area

LM RM

Print Area

Envelope

Paper Size

TM

per Feed Direction

Table 1-7. ScaItem

Scanner type Flatbed, color

Scanning method Moving carria

Home position Far left corner

Photoelectric device CIS

Light source LED

Maximum document size US letter, or A

Scanning range 8.5 x 11.7 inch

Maximum resolution Main scan: 12

Maximum effective pixels 10,200 x 14,04

Pixel depth 16 bit per pixe

Table 1-8.

RW (read width) OLM (left margin)

216 mm (8.5”) 1.5 mm +/- 1 mm

RW

ROTM

OLM

Scanning start posi

Home position

Page 17: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

P 17

1.

1.

No

ety standards/EMI)L60950-1 CC Part15 Subpart B Class B AN/CSA-CEI/IEC CISPR 22 Class B AN/CSA-C22.2 No.60950-1 NS13438 Class B NS14336 N60950-1 N55022 Class B N61000-3-2, EN61000-3-3 N55024 N60950-1 OST-R (IEC60950-1, CISPR 22)

EC60950-1 60950-1 N22 Class B 61000-4-2/-3/-4/-5/-6/-11 B4943 B9254 Class B, GB17625.1 S/NZS CISPR22 Class B

Glossy Photo Paper, in the highest quality)fault mode)

, Color 10,000 pages (A4, 5.0% duty),

years which ever comes first

Ra

In

Ra

Ra

In

In

Poco

RODUCT DESCRIPTION General Specifications

4 General Specifications

4.1 Electrical Specifications

te : If the printer is not operated for more than three minutes, the printer shifts into the standby mode and reduces the current to the motor to conserve power.

1.4.2 Safety Approvals (SafUSA U

FCanada C

CTaiwan C

CEU E

EEE

Germany ERussia GSingapore/Hong Kong IKorea K

KK

China GG

Australia A

1.4.3 Acoustic Noise36 dB (when printing from PC, on Premium 45 db (when copying on plain paper in the de

1.4.4 DurabilityTotal print life

Black 16,000 pages (A4, 3.5% duty)or five years which ever comes firstPrintheadSix billions shots (per nozzle) or fiveScanner carriage36,000 cycles of carriage movement

Table 1-9. Primary Power Specifications

Item 100-120 V model 220-240 V model

ted power supply voltage 100 to 120 VAC 220 to 240 VAC

put voltage range 90 to 132 VAC 198 to 264 VAC

ted current 0.6 A (Max 1.2 A) 0.3 A (Max 0.6 A)

ted frequency 50 to 60 Hz

put frequency range 49.5 to 60.5 Hz

sulation resistance 3000 V (for one minute)

wer nsumption

Standalone copying 20 W 20 W

Low Power Mode 7.5 W 8 W

Sleep Mode 4 W 4.5 W

Powered off Mode 0.3 W 0.6 W

Page 18: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

P 18

1.

No

ory card slots of the following specifications.

ice port for connecting with a host device such necting with an external device such as DSC

ted to the USB Host port.

rint Protocol Specification Rev1.0.-2003 (PictBridge) Specification.erial Bus Mass Storage Class Bulk-Only Transport is one of the followings. et)

C

Interface Specificatione Port USB Host Port*

Bus vision 2.0

Bus Device for Printing 1.1Bus Mass lk-Only on 1.0

• Universal Serial Bus Specifications Revision 2.0

• Universal Serial Bus Mass Storage Class Bulk-Only Transport Revision 1.0

80Mbps (High Speed Device)

NRZI

ies B USB Series A

Less than 2 m

RODUCT DESCRIPTION Interface

4.5 Environmental Conditions

te *1 : The combined Temperature and Humidity conditions must be within the blue-shaded range shown in Figure 1-4.

*2 : No condensation*3 : Must be less than 1 month under 40°C.

Figure 1-4. Temperature/Humidity Range

1.5 InterfaceThe printer has USB interfaces and mem

1.5.1 USB InterfacesThe printer has two USB ports; USB Devas a computer, and USB Host port for con(Digital Still Camera).

Note* : The following devices can be connec

• DSC compliant with USB Direct P• DSC compliant with CIPA DC-001• Devices compliant with Universal S

Revision 1.0, and the Subclass code0x06 (SCSI transparent command s0x05 (SFF-8070i command set) 0x02 (SFF-8020i command set)

Table 1-10. Environmental Conditions

Condition Temperature*1 Humidity*1,2 Shock Vibration

Operating 10 to 35°C(50 to 95°F) 20 to 80% 1G

(1 msec or less)0.15G,

10 to 55Hz

Storage (unpacked)

-20 to 40°C*3

(-4°F to 104°F) 5 to 85% 2G(2 msec or less)

0.50G, 10 to 55Hz

AUTION When returning the repaired printer to the customer, make sure the Printhead is covered with the cap and the ink cartridge is installed.If the Printhead is not covered with the cap when the printer is off, turn on the printer with the ink cartridge installed, make sure the Printhead is covered with the cap, and then turn the printer off.

10/5027/80

35/9520/68

Temperature (°C/°F)

20

30

40

50

90

80

70

60

Humidity (%)

30/86 40/104

Table 1-11. USB Item USB Devic

Standards

• Universal Serial Specifications Re

• Universal Serial Class Definition Devices Version

• Universal Serial Storage Class BuTransport Revisi

Transfer rate 4

Data format

Compatible connector USB Ser

Maximum cable length

Page 19: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

P 19

1.

Noble.

ill not change if a card is inserted in another

is in the active slot can be accessed via the

p. 21 ) ”.

P x. ity Remarks

B Includes versions with memory select function

B Copy protection function is not supported

An adapter should be used

Copy protection function is not supported

The Memory Stick Duo adapter should be used

The Memory Stick Duo adapter should be used.

The Memory Stick adapter for standard size should be used.

The SD adapter should be used

Speed Class is not supported

The SD adapter should be usedSpeed Class is not supported

/ Only MultiMediaCard Plus supports 4GB

Type M/H supported

True-IDE compatible memory card only

RODUCT DESCRIPTION Interface

5.2 Memory Card Slots

te: • Memory Stick/PRO, SD/MMC and xD-Picture Card shares the same slot.• When cards are inserted in the two slots at once, the slot which will be accessed first is determined according to the priority shown in the ta• To select a card that has been inserted in a non-active slot, first remove the card in the active slot. • In memory card direct printing mode, the image files in the active slot are valid and have assigned frame numbers. The number of images w

nonselected slot.• When the card inserted in the slot is accessed from the PC, only one drive is displayed at a time as a removable disk* and only the card that

removable disk. A card that has been inserted into a non-selected slot cannot be accessed. (This is for Windows. For Macintosh, the card in the active slot will be mounted on the desktop.)

• Does not support 5V type of memory cards.• When a memory card is being accessed, do not touch the memory card.• For detailed information on the supported file system and formatting the memory card, refer to “ 1.7.2 Memory Card Direct Print Function (

Table 1-12. List of Supported Memory Card

riority Slot Compatible memory card Standard Macapac

1

Memory Stick/Memory Stick PRO

Memory Stick “MemoryStick Standard” Format Specification Ver.1.42-00 compatible 128M

MagicGate Memory Stick 128M

MagicGate Memory Stick Duo

Memory Stick PRO Memory Stick PRO Format Specifications-without security Ver.1.02-00 compatible 4GB

Memory Stick Duo MemoryStick Duo Format Specification Ver.1.11-00 compatible

Memory Stick Pro Duo MemoryStick PRO Duo Format Specification Ver.1.02-00 compatible

Memory Stick micro Memory Stick Micro Format Specification Ver.1.02-00 compatible

SD/MMC

SD (Security Digital)

SD Memory Card Specifications / PART1. Physical Layer Specification Ver. 2.0 compatible

2GBminiSD/microSD

SDHC8GB

miniSDHC/microSDHC

MultiMediaCard MultiMediaCard Plus MultiMediaCard Standard Ver. 4.1 compatible 64MB

4GB

xD-Picture card xD-Picture card xD-Picture Card Specification Ver.1.20 compatible 2GB

2 CF Type IICompact Flash CF+ and CompactFlash Specification Revision 3.0 compatible 4GB

Microdrive

Page 20: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

P 20

1.

1.Thpan

No

rresponds to the previous mode lights.

Control Panel

B

L

LED Functions

Power LED Mode LED

Flashing OFF

Flashing The current mode LED flashes

Flashing All the mode LEDs flash

ON The current mode LED lights*

Flashing The current mode LED flashes*

ON The memory card mode LED lights

ON The memory card mode LED lights

ON The current mode LED lights*

ory card Button

Menu Button

LCDButton

utton

Stop / Clear settings ButtonStart Button

Back Button

OK Button and Cross buttons

+ Button- Button

RODUCT DESCRIPTION Control Panel

6 Control Panel

6.1 Operation Buttons & LEDe following tables explain the functions of the buttons and LEDs on the control el.

te * : See Table 1-14 for more information on the LEDs.

Note* : In the Setup mode, the mode LED co

Figure 1-5.

Table 1-13. Operation Buttons & LEDsButton/LED Function

utton

Power Turns the power ON/OFF.

Start Starts printing.

Copy Goes to the stand alone copy mode.

Memory Card Goes to the memory card direct print mode.

Specialty Print Goes to the special mode that provides Print Photo Greeting Card, Reprint/Restore Photos, and Print on CD/DVD functions.

Stop/Clear

• Stops operation and displays the menu screen.• Stops printing and ejects paper.• Returns the print settings of the current mode to their default

and displays the Top screen. (Returns to the previous screen during printing maintaining the current settings)

Setup Goes to the Setup mode that provides maintenance menu (head cleaning, head alignment, etc.) and various option setting menu.

Display/CropGoes to the zoom setting screen for the selected image.Changes the image preview layout (1-up, 9-up, etc.) on the LCD.

Menu Goes to the print setting menu screen.

OK Accepts the changed settings.

Back Cancels the previous operation.

Cross Key (up/down/left/right)

Selects a menu item of setting value.

+Sets the number of copies.

-

CD Print Tray Opens or closes the CD guide.

ED*Power Indicates the power On/Off status.

Mode Lights during the corresponding mode is selected.

Table 1-14.

Printer Status

Power-on sequence

Power-off sequence

Fatal error

Standby/The panel being operated

Printing/Scanning

Printing from an external device (PC/camera)

Running a head cleaning

Running a nozzle check

Printing head alignment pattern

Canceling a print job

Clipping of video

Making a backup copy

Performing Scan to Memory

Running a slide show

Displaying the screen-saver

Power save mode

Mem

Specialty Print Button

Power Button

Power LED

CD Print Tray Button

Power Button

Setup

Display/Crop B

Mode LED

Page 21: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

P 21

1.

1.Wimeseldesequcopsel

No

Print Functiont images stored in a memory card or media in SB Host port. When a memory card is lly searches for all images in a memory card,

n select images to be printed previewing them f copies up to 99 per image (up to 999 in ed in the Memory Card menu makes it easier

“Scan to Memory” function that stores also provided.

mats supported by the printer.

ifications, see “Camera File System Standard DCF

supports FAT32.d.

s supports level 1 of the P.I.F.Rev.3.1.

W

Bo

CD

W(E

Re

Re

2-

Bo

D

Bo

D

S

L

L

ystem, Types and Media FormatSpecification

n 1.0 or 2.0 *1 compliant. Other than those does roper operation. File systems available with the

are restricted by the host’s specification.

sion 1.0 or 2.0 compliantT format (FAT12/FAT16/FAT32 *2) with single (basic partitioned)

evel1 (Joliet) format

evel1 (Joliet), or ISO9660 Level1 (Joliet) & UDF at*3

conform to Exif Version 2.21. (Exif version 1.0/2.21 are supported)

inition files used for DPOF mode.TOPRINT.MRK” file is valid.

t definition files compliant with PRINT Image .2.1 specifications. Files in”/EPUDL/” directory

t definition files compliant with PRINT Image .3.1 *4 specifications. Files in a memory card are

RODUCT DESCRIPTION Specifications of Each Function

7 Specifications of Each Function

7.1 Stand-alone Copy Functionth the press of the Copy button, the printer goes into the Copy mode and displays a nu for copying. The menu allows the user to specify the number of copies up to 99, ect a copy layout from the preset options shown in Table 1-15, and specify the ired scaling. Duplex copying is available with the optional duplex unit (standard ipment for EAI models). When the duplex unit is installed, menu options for duplex ying are enabled which includes “Dry Time”. The “Dry Time” allows the user to

ect a time period for drying paper printed on its front surface (refer to Table 1-16).

te* : The layouts are available only when the duplex unit is installed and the document type is set to “Text” or “Graphics”.

1.7.2 Memory Card Direct This mode allows the user to directly prinan external device connected using the Uinserted in the slot, the printer automaticaand shows them on the LCD. The user caon the LCD and print specified number ototal). “Print Index Sheet” function providto specify images and their print settings.scanned data directly to a memory card isThe following table shows media file for

Note *1 : For more information on the DCF specVersion 2.0, JEIDA-CP-3461”.

*2 : Available only when the memory card*3 : UDF-formatted DVDs are not supporte*4 : The memory card direct print function

Table 1-15. Copy LayoutLayout Description

ith Border Makes a copy with 3mm of left/right/top/bottom white margins.

rderless Makes a copy with no white margins.

/DVD Copy Makes a copy of a CD/DVD label directly on a CD/DVD.

allet Copy AI model only)

Makes a specified number of “2.5x3.5 inch” size copies of one document on a sheet of selected sized paper.

peat Copy Makes a specified number of copies of one document on a sheet of selected sized paper.

peat Copy-4 Makes four copies of one document on a sheet of selected sized paper.

up Copy Makes a copy of two A4 or letter sized documents on a sheet of A4 or letter sized paper.

ok/2-up Makes a copy of two pages of opened book on a sheet of selected sized paper.

ouble Side 1-up* Duplex copy using the duplex unit. Makes a copy of two pages on front and back sides of one sheet of paper.

ok/Double Side* Duplex copy using the duplex unit. Makes a copy of two pages of opened book on front and back sides of one sheet of selected sized paper.

ouble Side 2-up*Duplex copy using the duplex unit. Makes a copy of four A4 or letter sized documents on front and back sides of one sheet of A4 or letter sized paper (two pages on each side).

Table 1-16. Dry Time SettingSetting Document Type is Text Document Type is Graphics

tandard 0 sec. 10 sec.

onger 30 sec. 30 sec.

ongest 60 sec. 60 sec.

Table 1-17. Supported File SItem

File SystemDCF Versionot ensure pcard reader

Media format

Memory card• DCF Ver• DOS FA

partition

CD-R ISO9660 L

DVDISO9660 LBridge form

File type

JPEG (*.JPG)Image files2.0/2.1/2.2/

Camera definition file (*.MRK)

Camera def“\MISC\AU

P.I.F definition file (*.USD)

Print layouFramer Revare valid.

P.I.F definition file (*.FD2)

Print layouFramer Revvalid.

Page 22: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

P 22

1.ThmabacdatTh

No

arily or due to an error, a “Backup canceled” igit error code on the LCD. The following es that are controlled by the printer firmware.

C

C

ror FW Control Code ListCode Meaning

0xC0 No files to be backed up

0xE7 Parameter error

0xE8 File open error

0xE9 Internal buffer overflow

0xEA CD/DVD format error

0xEB Not used

0xEC Insufficient memory

0xED Some data exist in the destination directory

0xEE Not used

0xEF Write-protect error

0xF0 Read/write error

0xF1 Invalid file open mode

0xF2 Seek error

0xF3 Overflow of root directory

0xF4 Overflow of file descriptor

0xF5 Invalid path name

0xF6 No file exist

0xF7 Medium was exchanged

0xF8 Unformatted medium

0xF9 Device is not ready

0xFA Invalid device handle

0xFB Invalid file descriptor

0xFC Not used

0xFD Backup initialization failed

0xFE Acquiring memory pool failed

0xFF System error

RODUCT DESCRIPTION Specifications of Each Function

7.3 Backup Functione Backup Memory Card function provided in the Setup mode allows the user to ke a backup copy of a memory card on a media in an external device. Printing the ked up images directly from the external device also can be made. Writing back a backed up on the external media to a memory card cannot be made. e available media for the backup are as follows.

MO: 128MB/230MB/640MB/1.3GB

CD-R: 650MB/700MB*1,2

DVD-R: 4.7GB*2

USB flash memory*3

te *1: A backup on 700MB or larger size CD-R is not ensured.*2 : The CD-R/DVD-R is burned in format described in Table 1-17.*3 : The printer cannot recognize USB flash memory that incorporates a hub.

1.7.3.1 Backup ErrorsIf a backup operation is cancelled voluntmessage appears with a hexadecimal 8-dtable lists the leftmost two-digit error cod

HECKPOINT

Due to the file system restriction, a backup of a memory card that has eight or more levels deep in folder hierarchy cannot be made on an ISO 9660 Level1-formatted CD-R.Due to the logical format of the CD/DVD, the pathname length is restricted as described below;•Destination media

ISO9660: up to 255byte Joliet: up to 240byte

•Source media: Memory card (FAT12/16/32): up to 260byte

HECKPOINT

The maximum number of writing times• FAT12/16-formatted media: up to 512 times (001 to 512)

If any files other than backup folders exist in the route directly, the max. number of writings becomes less than 512 due to the MS-DOS restriction. When more than 512 times of writing history of an inserted MO is detected, the printer handles it as a backup error (file name, to folder hierarchy error).

• CD-R: 640MB: up to 47 times 700MB: up to 50 times

This is because each session information must be saved.• DVD-R: 4.7GB: up to 274 times

This is because each session information must be saved.

Table 1-18. Backup ErCode Meaning

0x00 No error

0x10 Album function error

0x20 Backup function error

0xA0 Other ATAPI/SCSI command error

0xA1 ModeSense command error

0xA2 ModeSelect command error

0xA3 Get Disc Information command error

0xA4 Get Track Information command error

0xA5 Synchronize Cache command error

0xA6 CloseSession command error

0xA7 Read command error

0xA8 Write command error

0xA9 Set Speed command error

0xAA Eject command error

0xAB Drive lock command error

0xAC GetConfigration command error

0xAD Verify command error

0xAE Device error

0xB8 Short file name convert error

0xB9 Unsupported device

0xBA No medium

0xBB Not writable medium

0xBC Unsupported medium

0xBD Hierarchical directory error

0xBE Path length is too long

0xBF File name is too long

Page 23: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

P 23

1.Thspesetno

1.ThPri

enus and various configuration setting menus. unctions.

odels.

DPr

R

Ph(E

Pr

PlPh

ce Menu Items & FunctionsFunction

ttern to check the Printhead nozzles status is aning can be run if necessary.

leaning. The cleaning cannot be made when low d. In such case, an ink low error is displayed the cleaning.

r to adjust the brightness of the LCD.is -10 (minimum) to +10 (maximum).

nsure the bi-directional print quality. Follow the ed on the LCD to carry out the adjustment. The ch of the four modes is “5”, and can be changed 1 to 9.

ge replacement sequence. The sequence also can Levels menu or by following the instructions on nk-related error occurs.

dens the platen gap to reduce friction between the paper. The setting is applied until the printer , and returns to the default (Off) at the next

en gap is applied.aten gap is applied.

emory Card Data”, the printer automatically sing images in a memory card as a screen saver nel operation has been made for 180 seconds in o memory card is inserted, or when this is set to play does not change.

RODUCT DESCRIPTION Specifications of Each Function

7.4 Camera Direct Print Function (USB Direct Print/PictBridge)e printer supports direct print from a digital still camera that conforms to the cification shown in the following table. Basically the printer follows the print tings made by the digital camera, but changes some of the settings if the printer does t support the specified combination of paper type and layout.

7.5 Speciality Print Functionse following table explains the functions of each menu provided in the Speciality nt mode.

1.7.6 Setup ModeThe Setup mode provides maintenance mThe following explains about the menu f

1.7.6.1 Maintenance Menu

Note* : This menu is not provided on EAI m

Table 1-19. Available DSCUSB Direct Print PictBridge

SCs conform to USB Direct Print otocol Revision 1.0.

DSCs conform to CIPA DC-001-2003 Digital Photo Solutions for Imaging Devices (DPS version 1.0) or the Rev. 2.0.

Table 1-20. Speciality Print FunctionsItem Function

eprint/Restore PhotosAllows the user to copy their silver halide film-based pictures. The printer scans the pictures automatically detecting them as silver halide film-based picture, and makes a copy of them.

oto Greeting card AI model only)

This function is available with EAI models only. The user can create a greeting card combining an image in a memory card and a template selected from the preset options.

int on CD/DVDThis function allows the user to print an image in a memory card directly on a CD/DVD. Printing a CD jacket on A4 or letter size paper is also provided.

ay Movie and Print otos

Allows the user to clip an image or multiple images from a moving image took by a digital still camera and stored in a memory card, and print it/them. The following two options are provided.• Print 1 Frame: prints clipped one image on one sheet of paper.• Print N Frames: prints 12 images that are automatically clipped

from the user-specified range. The images are printed on one sheet of paper using a preset layout.

Table 1-21. MaintenanItem

Nozzle Check A nozzle check paprinted. A head cle

Head CleaningRuns a printhead cink level is detecteinstead of running

LCD BrightnessThis allows the useThe settable range

Head Alignment

An adjustment to einstructions displaydefault value for eawithin the range of

Change Ink CartridgeRuns an ink cartridbe run from the Inkthe LCD when an i

Thick Paper

Setting to “On” wiprinthead and thickpower is turned offpower-on.• Off: normal plat• On: the wider pl

Screen Saver Settings*

By setting to the “Mruns a slide show uwhen no control pastandby mode. If n“Off”, the LCD dis

Page 24: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

P 24

1.7

In

CD(ECDPo(E

BaCa

Pi

BlSe

RODUCT DESCRIPTION Specifications of Each Function

.6.2 Setup Menus other than MaintenanceTable 1-22. Setting Menu Items & Functions

Item Function

k Levels

The current ink levels of each of the cartridges are displayed in bar chart. After displaying the ink levels, the next operation can be selected from the following two options; “End the ink levels display” or “Change Ink Cartridge”. The ink level is indicated in increment of 1%. Lower than 1% is rounded down. When the ink level becomes lower than 10%, “!” icon appears to notify the user of the ink low status

Print Position AI)/Sticker Print

sition uro, Asia)

The printing range when printing on a CD/DVD or a sticker can be adjusted.

ckup Memory rd

Allows the user to make a backup copy of a memory card on media in an external device. The “Folder Select” displays a folder selection screen to select the target folder in an external media to be printed.The “Folder Select” menu item is disabled (grayout) when any external device is connected and/or no image files is detected in the inserted memory card. See “ 1.7.3 Backup Function ( p. 22 ) ” for more information on the backup function.

ctBridge Setup

The print settings to be used for the camera direct print (USB Direct Print/PictBridge) can be specified. When print settings (paper type, paper size, layout, quality, auto correct) are specified from the DSC, the DSC settings are applied and the settings made here are ignored. For more details, see “ 1.7.4 Camera Direct Print Function (USB Direct Print/PictBridge) ( p. 23 ) ”.

uetooth ttings

This menu is enabled only when the optional Bluetooth unit is connected. See “ ” for more information.

Page 25: RX680 Service Manual

C H A P T E R

2OP TING PRINCIPLES

ERA
Page 26: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

O 26

2.ThRX

2.ThareFo

rs f the motors and sensors. And the layout of the following page.

listed in the “Ref.” column indicates the position of the tor in Figure 2-2 or Figure 2-3 on the next page.

ist of motors and sensors

Motors/Sensors Ref.*---

(p.28) A

r (p.28) 1

(p.29) 2

n Sensor (CO Sensor) (p.29) 3

Sensor (p.30) 4

p.34) B

(p.34) 5

p.34) 6

sensor (p.45) 7

(p.34) C

er (p.35) 8

otor (p.35) D

retard home sensor (FP sensor) (p.35) 9

hase sensor (RP sensor) (p.35) 10

ome sensor (RH sensor) (p.36) 11

t sensor (DP sensor) (p.36) 12

---

PERATING PRINCIPLES Overview

1 Overviewis section describes the operating principles of the Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/690 mechanism and Electrical Circuit Boards.

1.1 Printer Mechanisme main structure of printer mechanism and the motors/sensors in each mechanism shown in the following figure. r Sensors names, See Table 2-1. "List of motors and sensors" (p26).

Figure 2-1. Printer mechanism overview

2.1.2 Motors and SensoThe following table shows the list osensors and motors is shown on the

Note *: The alphabet or the numbercorresponding sensor or mo

(4) Front ASF Retard Home

Sensor

PF Encoder

ASF Assy

PW Sensor

CR Encoder

PF Motor

Cover Open Sensor

PF Roller

Eject Roller

CR Assy

Printhead

Eject Frame

CD-R Guide Sensor

Ink System Assy

CR Guide Shaft

APG SensorAPG Assy

CR Motor

ASF EncoderASF Motor

ASF Sub Motor

PE Sensor

(1) Rear ASF Position Sensor

(2) Rear ASF Home Sensor

(3) Duplex Unit Sensor

(1) (2)

(3) (4)

Table 2-1. L

Mechanism NamesPrinthead (p.28)

Carriage Mechanism (p.28)

CR Motor

CR Encode

PW Sensor

Cover Ope

APG Mechanism (p.30) APG Phase

Paper Loading/Feeding Mechanism (p.33)

PF motor (

PF encoder

PE sensor (

CD-R Mechanism (p.45) CDR mode

Paper Loading/Feeding Mechanism (p.33)

ASF motor

ASF Encod

ASF Sub m

Front ASF

Rear ASF p

Rear ASF h

Duplex Print Unit (p.42) Duplex uni

Ink System (p.49)

Page 27: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

O 27

rs/sensors layout (scanner unit)

Scanner Carriage Unit

PERATING PRINCIPLES Overview

Figure 2-2. Motors/sensors layout (front side)

Figure 2-3. Motors/sensors layout (rear side)

Figure 2-4. MotoB

12

5

6

7

3

C

AD

4

89

1011

12

CR encoder

CR Motor

Page 28: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

O 28

2.

2.

Th

smf the CR motor, Timing belt, Driven pulley, CR etc.

ushes) and it is controlled by positional/speed e CR encoder.

tor may generate a excessive heat in continuous he motor is driven or not, a heating value is nitor the motor temperature while the power is ON. s a specified value, the operation is forcibly paused

P

CR motor specificationsSpecifications

tor with brushes (Mabuchi RS445PD-16175BR)

irect voltage) ± 5% (voltage applied to driver)

± 10%

H (1kHz)

m2

constant-current chopping

(Allegro company product)

CR encoder specificationsSpecifications

e B channel digital output (TTL)

oltage: 2.4VDC (min.)ltage: 0.6VDC (max.)

h

photo interrupter

PERATING PRINCIPLES Printer Mechanism Operating Principles

2 Printer Mechanism Operating Principles

2.1 PrintheadPrint method : On-demand ink jet (F-Mach Turbo 2 head)

Nozzle layout

e nozzle layout when viewed from the back surface of the Printhead is shown below.

Figure 2-5. Nozzle layout

2.2.2 Carriage MechaniThe Carriage mechanism consists oguide shaft, Carriage unit, CR scale

2.2.2.1 CR MotorThe CR motor is DC motor (with brinformation obtained by means of th

Since the DC motor is used, the mooperations. To avoid this, whether tcalculated at regular intervals to moWhen the motor temperature exceedfor a specified period of time.

2.2.2.2 CR Encoder

Colors Bk, C, M, Y, Lc, Lm (6 colors)

Number of nozzles 540 nozzles (90 Nozzles for each colors x 6 columns)

Nozzle pitch 0.282mm (1/90 inch), cross-layout

A#90A#89A#88

A#3A#2A#1

B#90B#89B#88

B#3B#2B#1

D#90D#89D#88

D#3D#2D#1

F#90F#89F#88

F#3F#2F#1

C#90C#89C#88

C#3C#2C#1

E#90E#89E#88

E#3E#2E#1

aper FeedDirection

Carriage Moving Direction

Table 2-2. Item

Type DC mo

Voltage 42V (d

Feature

Armature resistance 19.7Ω

Inductance 11.6 m

Rotor inertia 16.2 gc

Drive Method PWM,

Driver A6651

Table 2-3. Item

Power supply voltages 3.3VDC ± 5%

Output waveform Phase A, phas

Output levelHigh output vLow output vo

Resolution 180 pulses/inc

Signal detection section Transmissive

Page 29: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

O 29

2.2

2.2Whcardis

6. Carriage Mechanism

Bottom of Carriage Unit

Ty

Po

Ou

Ty

Po

Ou

CR shaft

CR motor

Driven pulley unit

CR scale

CR encoder

Timing belt

CR encoder

PERATING PRINCIPLES Printer Mechanism Operating Principles

.2.3 PW SensorDetection items

Detects the left, right, top and bottom edges of a cut sheet.Detects the CD-R center

Specifications

Result output

.2.4 Cover Open Sensor (CO Sensor)en the Cover Open sensor detects that the scanner unit is open, the operation of the riage is stopped to prevent users from getting injured. And then cover open error is played.

Detection item

Detects the cover (scanner unit) open/close

Specifications

Result outputs

Figure 2-

Figure 2-7.

Item Specifications

pe Reflective photo interrupter (TOSHIBA S7K95)

wer supply voltages 3.3VDC ± 5%

tput waveform 1 channel analogue output

Detected state Output

Paper Present 0V (reference value)

Paper Absent 3.3V (reference value)

Item Specifications

pe Mechanical contact points (Mik Denshi MPU10980MMB0)

wer supply voltages 3.3VDC ± 5%

tput waveform 1 channel analogue output

Detected state Output

Cover open 2.4V or more

Cover close 0.4V or less

Carriage unit

Printhead

PW sensor

Page 30: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

O 30

2.APset

TohomInk

AlsgapSee

Th 2-9. APG mechanism

Specifications

o interrupter (TOSHIBATLP1243(C8))

output

Output

2.4V or more

0.4V or less

otor

Right PG cam

APG phase sensor

PERATING PRINCIPLES Printer Mechanism Operating Principles

2.3 APG MechanismG mechanism is provided to change the platen gap (PG) automatically within five tings using the driving force of the ASF motor.

drive the APG mechanism for changing the platen gap, the carriage is moved to its e position to release the change lever, and then the forced clutch is switched to the

system/APG drive side.

Figure 2-8. Switching of Forced Clutch (APG)

o the APG mechanism is interlocked with CDR guide mechanism. When the platen is set to the CDR guide position, the driving force is transmitted to the CDR guide. “2.2.5.2 CDR Guide Auto Switching Operation” (p.45).

e next section describes the components of APG mechanism.

2.2.3.1 APG Phase SensorDetection item

Detects the PG position Specifications

Result output

Figure

Change lever

Carriage Assy

Change lever

Forced clutch

Item

Type Transmissive phot

Power supply voltages 3.3VDC ± 5%

Output waveform 1 channel analogue

Detected state

In PG position

Out of PG position

ASF m

Left PG cam

CR shaft

Carriage Assy

Page 31: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

O 31

2.2Th

F motor driving path (APG) (2)

motor driving path (APG) (2)

10. Combination gear 17.6, 11.2B2.8

2.4 11. Flag combination gear 40.8,36

APG phase sensor

1.2A

79

10

11 8

Right PG cam

g combination gear 40.8,36 APG Assy

PERATING PRINCIPLES Printer Mechanism Operating Principles

.3.2 APG Driving Pathe driving path of ASF motor to drive APG is shown below.

Flowchart 2-1. ASF motor driving path (APG) (1)

Figure 2-10. ASF motor driving path (APG) (1)

Flowchart 2-2. AS

Figure 2-11. ASF

ASF motor

1. Spur gear 18.5 (Forced clutch)

2. Combination gear 24.5, 9.6

4. Spur gear 27.2 (I/S)

6. Transmissive combination gear 20.8, 11.23. Spur gear 11.2 (I/S)

5. APG Planetary gear (Spur gear 9.6)

To A

23

4

5

1

6

ASF motor (Rear)

5. APG Planetary gear (Spur gear 9.6) APG Assy

6. Transmissive combination gear

(Transmits the driving force to APG)

Ink system (I/S)

8. Combination gear 16, 1

9. Spur gear 2

Right PG cam

7. Combination gear 17.6, 1

A

6

CR shaft

11. Fla

6. Transmissive combination gear

(Transmits the driving force to APG)

APG phase sensor

Page 32: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

O 32

2.2Th

Sw , and then the forced clutch is switched to the Ink system/APG

PGcam on the carriage shaft to change the PG position. Each PG terclockwise rotation of the ASF motor. When the position is

AS

AP et the PG position to Pos.1.

P

A

Ts.4

Pos.5

→(To Pos.1)

R PG(++)

P .2 4.2

P rive position CD/DVD print position

S

- Printing on CD/DVD

ide drivetary gear is sed)

Ink cartridge replacement

Rm

DR PG(++)

igh Low High Low

PERATING PRINCIPLES Printer Mechanism Operating Principles

.3.3 Basic Operationse basic operations of APG mechanism are described below.

Basic operations

Table 2-4. Basic operations

itching to the APG To drive the APG mechanism for changing PG position, the carriage is moved to its home position to release the change leverdrive side.

position change actionThe counterclockwise rotation of the ASF motor switches the APG Planetary gear to the APG drive, and rotate the right PG position is set on the surface of the right PG cam, so the PG position is changed from pos.1 to pos.5 in that order by the counset to Pos.5, the further rotation makes the position return to pos.1.

F motor controlThe ASF motor is controlled by the APG phase sensor and ASF encoder at all times while the APG mechanism is driven. About the output and meaning of APG phase sensor, See “2.2.3.1 APG Phase Sensor” (p30).

G initialization When the PG position is unknown at power-on or after recovering from an error, the printer conducts APG initialization to s

Table 2-5. PG Position transition diagram

G

PG phase sensor

ypePos.1

Pos.2

Pos.3

Po

PG(-) PG(Typ.) PG(+) CD

G dimensions (mm) 1.2 1.7 2.35 4

osition name Home position Normal position PG large position CDR guide d

pecification

Printing Printing on Epson paperPrinting on Plain paperAvoid friction at PG(-)

Printing on envelopeAvoid friction at

PG(Typ.)

Not printing

The home position at power-on (when

initialized)Capping/wiping

- -CDR gu

(CDR planerelea

otational direction of ASF otor

PG(-) PG(Typ.) PG(+)C

High High Low High Low H Low

Counterclockwise

Page 33: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

O 33

2.ThmemeautautTh

WhcheposposThtrapaptyp

PA Paper feeding mechanism

of the motors/sensors used in the Front ASF, g mechanism, and their operating principles are

EJ roller

EJ frame

roller (Upper Paper Guide) Front Paper Guide

PF motor

PERATING PRINCIPLES Printer Mechanism Operating Principles

2.4 Paper Loading/Feeding Mechanisme paper loading mechanism consists of Front ASF, Rear ASF and CDR guide. This chanism transports the paper from each ASF or CDR guide to the paper feeding chanism such as PF roller. When the optional Duplex Print unit is installed, omatic duplex printing is available. After printing on the front side, the paper is omatically reversed in the Duplex Print Unit to print on the back side.e outline of the paper loading/feeding mechanism is described below.

en a print job is started from the printer driver or the control panel, the printer cks the selected paper path and print data for any error. Then the printer sets the PG ition using the APG and moves the carriage toward 80 digit side from its home ition. The motors of the ASF mechanism then start to move to load the paper or CD.

e fed paper is transported to the PF roller and its skew is corrected, and the paper is nsported to the print position. Then the paper feeding mechanism starts, and the er is transported up to the paper ejecting process. This printer is equipped with three es of paper feeding mechanism; Front ASF, Rear ASF and CDR guide.

PER FEEDING PATH (FEEDING MECHANISM)

Flowchart 2-3. PF motor driving path

Figure 2-12.

In following pages, the specificationsRear ASF, Duplex unit, paper feedindescribed.

EJ roller+Star wheel (EJ frame)PF roller+ driven roller (Upper Paper Guide)

PF motor

PF roller pulley (PF roller)

PF Timing belt

EJ roller pulley (EJ roller)

PF roller Driven

PF Timing belt

PF scale

Page 34: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

O 34

2.2Thdes

PF

Thdricon

PF

f the paper to control the feeding condition paper

force for the LD roller of the Rear ASF, APG, Ink SF, etc. The ASF motor is controlled by the ASF

Ty

Vo

Fea

Dr

Dr

Po

Ou

Ou

Re

Sig

Specifications

oto interrupter (NIPPON ALEPH, OJ-611-A8)

ue output

Output

2.4V or more

0.4V or less

ASF motor specificationsSpecifications

tor with brushes (MABUCHI, RS385PH-13200R)

irect voltage) ± 5% (applied voltage for the driver)

± 10%

H (1kHz)

m2

constant-current chopping

(Allegro company product)

PERATING PRINCIPLES Printer Mechanism Operating Principles

.4.1 Specifications of Motors/Sensorse specifications of the motors/sensors used in the paper feeding mechanisms are cribed below.

MOTOR

e PF motor provides the driving force for paper feeding, CR lock/wiper, CDR Guide ve, Idle roller drive for the front ASF, Duplex print unit drive, etc. The PF motor is trolled by the PF encoder.

encoder

PE SENSOR

Detection items

Detects the leading edge oDetects the rear edge of the

Specifications

Result output

ASF MOTOR

The ASF motor provides the drivingsystem, pick-up roller of the front Aencoder.

Table 2-6. PF motor specificationsItem Specifications

pe DC motor with brushes (MABUCHI, RS445PD-18140BR)

ltage 42V (direct voltage) ± 5% (applied voltage for the driver)

ture

Armature resistance 12.2W ± 10%

Inductance 7.45mH (1kHz)

Rotor inertia 16.2 gcm2

iving method PWM, constant-current chopping

iver A6651 (Allegro company product)

Table 2-7. PF encoder specificationsItem Specifications

wer supply voltages 3.3VDC ± 5%

tput waveform Phase A, phase B 2 channel digital output (TTL)

tput levelHigh output voltage: 2.4V DC (min.)Low output voltage: 0.4V DC (max.)

solution 360 pulse/inch

nal detection section Transmissive photo interrupter

Item

Type Transmissive ph

Power supply voltages 3.3VDC ± 5%

Output waveform 1 channel analog

Detected state

Paper present

Paper absent

Table 2-8. Item

Type DC mo

Voltage 42V (d

Feature

Armature resistance 21.9Ω

Inductance 9.21 m

Rotor inertia 7.45 gc

Driving method PWM,

Driver A6651

Page 35: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

O 35

AS

AS

ThBa

P sensor)

ont Retard roller

SENSOR)

of Rear ASF

Po

Ou

O

Re

Sig

Ty

Vo

Fea

Dr

Dr

Specifications

interrupter (TOSHIBA TLP1243(C8))

output

Output

2.4V or more

0.4V or less

Specifications

interrupter (TOSHIBA TLP1243(C8))

output

Output

2.4V or more

0.4V or less

PERATING PRINCIPLES Printer Mechanism Operating Principles

F Encoder

F Sub motor

e ASF Sub motor provides the driving force for the hopper of the Rear ASF, Paper ck lever control and Retard roller of the front ASF.

Front ASF retard home sensor (F

Detection item

Detects the condition of Fr

Specifications

Result output

REAR ASF PHASE SENSOR (RP

Detection item

Detects the hopper position

Specifications

Result output

Table 2-9. ASF encoder specificationsItem Specifications

wer supply voltages 3.3VDC ± 5%

tput waveform Phase A, Phase B 2 channel digital output (TTL)

utput levelHigh output voltage: 2.4V DC (min.)Low output voltage: 0.4V DC (max.)

solution 180 pulse/inch

nal detection section Transmissive photo interrupter

Table 2-10. ASF Sub motor specificationsItem Specifications

pe DC motor with brushes (MABUCHI, FC280SA-08600HR)

ltage 42V (direct voltage) ± 5% (applied voltage for the driver)

ture

Armature resistance 47.1Ω ± 15%

Inductance 26.0 mH (1kHz)

Rotor inertia 4.03 gcm2

iving method PWM, constant-current chopping

iver A6651 (Allegro company product)

Item

Type Transmissive photo

Power supply voltages 3.3VDC ± 5%

Output waveform 1 channel analogue

Detected state

Front Retard UP

Front Retard Home

Item

Type Transmissive photo

Power supply voltages 3.3VDC ± 5%

Output waveform 1 channel analogue

Detected state

In Rear ASF position

Between the positions

Page 36: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

O 36

RE

DU

Mechanism (Front ASF)

er feeding path in the front paper feeding.

ont ASF paper feeding path

Ty

Po

Ou

Ty

Po

Ou

F motor

Front Paper Guide

EJ frame

Cassette Assy

PERATING PRINCIPLES Printer Mechanism Operating Principles

AR ASF HOME SENSOR (RH SENSOR)

Detection item

Detects the position of Rear ASF hopper (Home/out)

Specifications

Result output

PLEX UNIT SENSOR (DP SENSOR)

Detection item

Detects the Duplex unit presence

Specifications

Result output

2.2.4.2 Front Paper Feeding

PAPER FEEDING PATH

The following figure shows the pap

Figure 2-13. Fr

Item Specifications

pe Transmissive photo interrupter (TOSHIBA TLP1243(C8))

wer supply voltages 3.3VDC ± 5%

tput waveform 1 channel analogue output

Detected state Output

Out of home position 2.4V or more

In home position 0.4V or less

Item Specifications

pe Mechanical contact points (Mik Denshi MPU10980MMB0)

wer supply voltages 3.3VDC ± 5%

tput waveform 1 channel analogue output

Detected state Output

Duplex unit absent 2.4V or more

Duplex unit present 0.4V or less

P

EJ roller pulley

PF roller pulley

Timing belt

Page 37: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

O 37

MO

Thfee

motor drive force transmission

motor drive force transmission

3. Combination gear 28.7,18

4. Spur gear 24.1 RMD

5. Spur gear 24 FASF

6. Spur gear 34.5

Idle roller

2. FASF Planetary gear<PF motor status>

CW: contacts with 1 to drive Idle roller CCW: stops the separation e roller

PF motor (CW)

11. Spur gear 12PF(on the PF roller)2

34

5

PERATING PRINCIPLES Printer Mechanism Operating Principles

TOR DRIVE TRANSMISSION

e driving force of the ASF sub motor is transmitted as shown below in the front ding operation.

Flowchart 2-4. ASF sub motor drive force transmission

Flowchart 2-5. PF

Figure 2-14. PF

Right side of printer

12

3

4

5

67

8

ASF sub motor (CCW)

1. RASF Planetary gear (Spur gear12)

3. Spur gear 23A

4. Spur gear 23B

5. Spur gear 23C

6. Combination gear 32.11

7. Spur gear 11

8. Spur gear cam 27

Retard reset shaft (switch)

Front retard roller (UP)

Front retard roller

ASF sub motor (CCW)

2. RASF Planetary gear (Spur gear12)

Retard reset shaft

Retard ASF Assy

1.2 RASF Planetary gear<ASF sub motor status>CCW: to drive Front retard

CW: to drive hopper

PF motor (CW)

PF roller pulley (PF roller)

PF Timing belt

1. Spur gear 12PF (PF roller)

2. FASF Planetary gear(Combination gear12, 2, 12)

Left side of printer

Idl

Front Retard roller

6

Page 38: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

O 38

RVIEW (FRONT ASF)

ding mechanism is described below.

aper feeding is like below due to the power-on feed sequence.L (Front Retard Home)L (Rear Home)H (Rear Pos.)n its home position and the Front Retard roller is in his time, RASF Planetary gear is free from the cam F Sub motor can cause either the Rear ASF hopper er to move up/down.re 2-3 (p.27)/ Flowchart 2-7 (p.40).

the Front ASF, the PF motor rotates clockwise a ve the FASF Planetary gear toward the Idle roller r drive force transmission” (p.37).of the ASF Sub motor moves the RASF Planetary de. The ASF Sub motor keeps counterclockwise rd. At this time the Front Position sensor is

ition sensor becomes High state, the rise of the the ASF Sub motor stops. In this manner the Front the Idle roller. This allows the paper to be fed by ee Flowchart 2-4 (p.37)/ Figure 2-15 (p.39).

PERATING PRINCIPLES Printer Mechanism Operating Principles

Flowchart 2-6. ASF motor drive force transmission

OPERATION SEQUENCE OVE

The operation of the front paper fee

1. The condition before starting psequence or the previous paperFront position sensor Rear Home sensorRear position sensorIn this condition, Rear ASF is ithe Home position (down). At tof the Spur gear 34.4, so the ASto drive or the Front Retard roll See Flowchart 2-4 (p.37)/ Figu

2. When starting paper feed from specified number of steps to moside. See Figure 2-14“PF moto

3. The counterclockwise rotation gear toward the Front Retard sirotation to lift up the Front Retamonitored. When the Front posFront Retard is completed and Retard comes into contact withthe rotation of the Idle roller. S

ASF motor (CCW)

1. Spur gear18.5

2. Combination gear 25.5, 20.8, 11.2

4. Spur gear30.4

5. Spur gear 11.2

Timing belt PU2

6. Spur gear 9.6 pulley

8. Spur gear 10

7. Spur gear 14.4

9. Clutch PU

Timing belt PU1

10. Pick-up pulley

Pick-up roller

1

23

4

56

7

89

10

Rear ASF Right

ASF motor (Rear)

Timing belt PU2

3. ASF Planetary gear<ASF motor status>CCW: to drive Pick-up roller

CW: to drive LD roller

3. ASF Planetary gear (spur gear 18.4)

Timing belt PU1

Pick-up roller

Page 39: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

O 39

4.

5.

er feeds the paper to the Idle roller/Front Retard ASF motor rotates a specified number of steps, the nt Retard roller. Then those rollers which are

ort the paper until it is detected by the PE sensor. ecelerated to stop the rotation of the Pick-up roller.

ront ASF paper feeding path

paper presence, the paper is moved forward a int position. With this step the Front paper feeding e PF roller which is rotated by the PF motor starts

tion.

peration is completed, the ASF motor rotates ront Retard roller down so that it returns to the Position sensor goes to Low state, the ASF Sub

S

EJ roller

PF roller Pick-up roller

PE sensor

Right side

PERATING PRINCIPLES Printer Mechanism Operating Principles

Figure 2-15. Condition before starting front feeding

The clockwise rotation of the PF motor causes the Idle roller/Front Retard roller to rotate. Then the printer starts to monitor the paper with the PE sensor.

The rotation of a specified number of steps of the PF motor causes the ASF motor to rotate counterclockwise to move the ASF Planetary gear toward the pick-up roller side. The ASF motor keeps counterclockwise rotation monitoring load to drive the pick-up roller, and the front feeding is started. (If a high load is detected while the ASF motor rotates a specified number of steps, the printer judges that no paper is loaded and indicates the Paper Out error.)See Flowchart 2-6 (p.38).

6. The rotation of the Pick-up rollroller in the cassette. When the paper reaches the Idle roller/Frostarted to rotate in step 4 transpAt this time the ASF motor is d

Figure 2-16. F

7. When the PE sensor detects thepreset number of steps to the properation is completed. Then ththe further paper feeding opera

8. After the Front paper feeding ocounterclockwise to bring the Fhome position. When the Frontmotor is stopped.

Front retard Home

Front retard Up

ASF sub motor

RASF Planetary gear

FP sensor

pur gear cam

Idle roller

Front retard roller

Front Retard roller

Front retard roller

Upper paper guide FASF

Idle roller

Page 40: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

O 40

2.2

PA

Th

N

otor is transmitted as shown below in the rear Paper feeding mechanism” (p.33) for ng path.

sub motor drive force transmission

P

Right side of printer

12

3

47

5

6

ASF Sub motorD roller

1,2 RASF Planetary gear<ASF motor status>

CCW: to drive Front retard CW: to drive hopper

7. Flag gear (outside)

Hopper

Paper back cam

PERATING PRINCIPLES Printer Mechanism Operating Principles

.4.3 Rear Paper Feeding Mechanism (Rear ASF)

PER FEEDING PATH

e following figure shows the paper feeding path in the Rear paper feeding operation.

Figure 2-17. Rear ASF paper feeding path

MOTOR DRIVE TRANSMISSIO

The driving force of the ASF sub mfeeding operation. See Figure 2-12“information on the PF motor drivi

Flowchart 2-7. ASF

PF motor

EJ roller pulley

F roller pulley

EJ frame

Upper Paper Guide

Timing belt

Rear ASF Assy

L

ASF sub motor

3. Hopper combination gear 39.5, 10.4

Paper back cam

4. Spur gear 34.4

1. RASF Planetary gear (Spur gear 12)

2. RASF Planetary gear (Spur gear 12)

6. Spur gear 24FASF (inside)

5. Hopper release cam

Hopper

Page 41: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

O 41

OP

Th

1.

2.

3.

SF motor moves the ASF Planetary gear toward eding. From this time the printer starts to monitor PE sensor. At the same time the PF motor starts to F roller. See Flowchart 2-8 (p.41). paper presence, the ASF/PF motor is driven to e paper is moved forward in a preset number of this step the rear paper feeding operation is PF roller driven by the PF motor starts the paper

Rear Position sensor, the ASF sub motor rotates elease cam to move the hopper toward the print m lifts the Paper Back lever up to avoid double

ear ASF paper feeding path

3

EJ roller

PF motor

PE sensor

PF roller

PERATING PRINCIPLES Printer Mechanism Operating Principles

Flowchart 2-8. ASF motor drive force transmission

ERATION SEQUENCE OVERVIEW (REAR ASF)

e operation of the rear paper feeding mechanism is described below.

Before starting the Rear ASF paper feeding, the Rear ASF is in its home position as it does before the front feeding. (Step 1.“ Operation Sequence Overview (front ASF) (p.38)”)

The clockwise rotation of the ASF Sub motor moves the RASF Planetary gear toward the Hopper, and the printer starts to monitor the Rear Position sensor. The Rear Position sensor goes to low state after the ASF Sub motor starts to rotate. The motor stops when the sensor becomes high state. See Flowchart 2-7 (p.40).The driving force of the ASF Sub motor causes the Paper Back cam to press down the Paper Back lever, and the Hopper Release cam lifts the hopper so that the hopper contacts the LD roller. See Flowchart 2-7 (p.40).

4. The clockwise rotation of the Athe LD roller to start the rear fethe feeding operation using therotate clockwise to rotate the P

5. When the PE sensor detects thecorrect the paper skew. Then thsteps to the print position. Withcompleted. In the next step, thefeeding process.

6. While the printer monitors the clockwise to cause the hopper rposition and the Paper Back cafeed.

Figure 2-18. R

Right side of printer

ASF motor (CW)

1

25

43

LD roller

LD roller

4. Flag gear RASF

5. Spur gear 24LD (outside)

1. Spur gear 18.5

. ASF Planetary gear (Spur gear 18.4)

ASF motor (CW)

2. Combination gear 25.5, 20.8, 11.2

3. ASF Planetary gear<ASF motor status>CW: to drive the LD roller

CCW: to drive pick-up roller

LD roller

Retard roller (RASF)

Right side

Page 42: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

O 42

2.2Whposon

Whand

PA

N

motor drive force transmission

P

D57 roller

13. Spur gear32

14. Combination gear 65.6, 44.8

15. Spur gear 17.6

D21 roller

9. Duplex Planetary gear CCW: under spur gear 19.2CW: above spur gear 19.2

11. Combination gear16, 16

12. Spur gear32

10. Spur gear 19.2CCW: under spur gear 19.2CW: above spur gear 19.2

PERATING PRINCIPLES Printer Mechanism Operating Principles

.4.4 Duplex Print Uniten the optional Duplex unit is installed, the automatic Duplex print becomes sible. The paper printed on its front side is automatically reversed and then printed its back side.

en the printer receives a duplex print job from the driver, the printed paper is dried transported to the Duplex unit, then reversed in it and reloaded to the printer.

PER FEEDING PATH

Figure 2-19. Duplex unit paper feeding path

MOTOR DRIVE TRANSMISSIO

Flowchart 2-9. PF

Paper guide front

PF motor

F roller pulley

Timing belt

EJ frame

D21 roller

D57 roller

Duplex unit2. Spur gear 40

3. Spur gear 19 (on Rear ASF)

4. Spur gear 20 (on Rear ASF)

5. Combination gear 28, 20 (on Rear ASF)

6. Combination gear28, 14.4

7. Combination gear 32, 17.6

PF motor (CCW/CW)

PF roller pulley

1. Spur gear 12PF (on PF roller)

PF Timing belt

8. Combination gear16, 16

Page 43: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

O 43

RVIEW (DUPLEX UNIT)

r causes the Planetary gear in the Duplex unit to the Duplex unit. Both the rotational directions of ver, to reduce wear of rollers and motor load, the

tation of the PF motor is not transmitted to the uplex Auto Shutoff” in this manual) in cases listed on of the PF motor always moves the Duplex unit.)

ON, or when recovers from the low power modee Duplex modepleted.

erational sequence of the Duplex unit.tting the reverse standard positionide is completed, the PE motor transports the paper y the PE sensor. Because the Duplex unit is in the e PF motor clockwise drive is not transmitted.

d time period specified by the printer driver for s) and the printer indicates on the LCD that it is in

F motor rotates clockwise to transport the paper J roller, and pauses again for drying the paper for a he driver for 2nd dry process.

-21. Drying operation

1

C

EJ roller

1st dry process 2nd dry process

PERATING PRINCIPLES Printer Mechanism Operating Principles

Figure 2-20. Components of Duplex unit

OPERATION SEQUENCE OVE

The driving force from the PF motomove so that the paper is fed insidethe motor cause the operation, howedriving force from the clockwise roDuplex unit (this is referred to as “Dbelow. (The counterclockwise rotati

When the power is turned When the paper exists in thWhen the CDR print is com

The following part describes the op1. Paper rear edge detection for se

After the printing on the front suntil its Rear edge is detected b“Duplex Auto Shutoff” state, th

2. Drying the front printed sideThe PF motor pauses for a fixedrying the paper (1st dry procesthe drying process. Then, the Puntil its rear edge reaches the Efixed time period specified by t

Figure 2

1

2

10

PF roller pulley

3

45

6

7

8

911

12

13

14

15

9. Duplex Planetary gear <PF motor status>Transmits both of CCW/CW rotation in a fixed direction.

D57 roller

D21 roller

0. Spur gear 19.2<PF motor status>CW: outer side transmits the drive to (11) CW: inner side transmits the drive to (11)

PF motorPF Timing belt

Left sidePE sensor

PF roller

Page 44: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

O 44

3.

4.

ex Auto Shutoff state, the clockwise rotation of the rse and transports it to the PE sensor.

lex unit paper feeding path (2) back sideper is detected by the PE sensor, the paper is r of steps which is specified by paper type. Then ted.

lex unit paper feeding path (3)

Left side

PF motor

EJ rollerPE sensor

PF roller

er Guide (Duplex)

EJ rollerPF roller

Left side

E sensor

PERATING PRINCIPLES Printer Mechanism Operating Principles

Detection of the rear edge of the paper after dryingAfter the drying sequence, the drying indication on the LCD disappears and then the PF motor rotates counterclockwise until the PF sensor detects the paper presence.

Transporting into the Duplex unitAfter the PF sensor detects the paper, the PF motor rotates a specified number of steps to transport the paper to the reverse start position and then stops. At this time the printer quits the Duplex Auto Shutoff state so that the clockwise rotation of the PF motor is transmitted to the Duplex unit.

Figure 2-22. Duplex unit paper feeding path (1)

5. Reversing the paperAfter the printer quits the DuplPF motor makes the paper reve

Figure 2-23. Dup6. Paper setting for printing on the

After the leading edge of the pamoved forward a preset numbeprinting on the back side is star

Figure 2-24. Dup

EJ roller pulley

Left sideD57 roller

PE sensor

PF roller

D57 roller

Low

D57 roller

D21 roller

P

Page 45: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

O 45

2.ThbetStydri

Thtra

2.2CD

e CDR guide

itching Operation button moves the CDR guide from the ASF paper on, or to the opposite direction. However, the CDR below.

print job other than CDR print job

P

Specifications

act points (Mik Denshi MPU10980MNB0)

ue output

Output

2.4V or more

0.4V or less

PERATING PRINCIPLES Printer Mechanism Operating Principles

2.5 CD-R Mechanismis printer supports direct print on a CDR with the CDR tray. Manually switching ween ASF feed and CD feed using the lever is not required as the previous models. lus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 equip with the automatic switching operation ven by the PF motor.

is section describes the details of the Auto CDR guide switching operation, CDR y transporting path and their components.

.5.1 CDR Tray Transporting Path and ComponentsR tray transporting path and the components are shown below.

Figure 2-25. CDR feeding path

CDR MODE SENSOR

Detection item

Detects the condition of th

Specifications

Result output

2.2.5.2 CDR Guide Auto SwPressing the “CD guide open/close”feed position to the CDR print positiguide does not move in cases listed

During other operations

When the printer has received a

PF motor

EJ roller pulley

EJ frame

Front Paper Guide

Timing belt

CDR guide

F roller pulley

Item

Type Mechanical cont

Power supply voltages 3.3VDC ± 5%

Output waveform 1 channel analog

Detected state

Position Hi/Low

Position not fixed (moving)

Page 46: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

O 46

MO

Thpos

ve force transmission (CDR mechanism)

PF motor

8

9

10

11

CDR shaft

CDR guide

PERATING PRINCIPLES Printer Mechanism Operating Principles

TOR DRIVE TRANSMISSION

e driving force of the PF motor is transmitted as shown below in the CDR guide ition switching operation.

Flowchart 2-10. PF motor drive force transmission (CDR mechanism)

Figure 2-26. PF motor dri

PF motor (CCW:UP/CW:DOWN)

PF Timing belt

EJ roller pulley

1. Spur gear 16 (above EJ roller)

2. CDR Planetary gearmoving Up: above planetary Spur gear12

moving Down: under planetary spur gear 12

3. Spur gear 12A

4. Spur gear 12B

5. Combination gear 36, 24

6. Spur gear 24L

7. Combination gear 36, 24L

8. Combination gear 35.2, 8.8L

CDR guide L side

10. Combination gear 36, 24R

11. Combination gear 35.2, 8.8R

CDR guide R side

CDR shaft 9. Spur gear 24R PF Timing belt

EJ roller pulley

1

2 3 4

5 7

6

2. CDR Planetary gear<PF motor status>

CCW: move CDR guide upward CW: move the guide downward

Page 47: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

O 47

OP

Whmeloctra

olled by the flag and the CDR mode sensor. If the detected, the CDR retrying sequence is performed

ing the CDR guide up/down according to the state

R guide Up/Down are described below.

rinting position)

the CDR guide drive position by the APG f the CDR Planetary gear. See Figure rm and Planetary gear (When lifted)”(p.47).ockwise to lift the CDR guide up. During this monitored. At this time the CDR mode sensor goes

ide/mode sensor at starting to lift up

es to Low state, the PF motor rotates decelerating a ve the CDR guide to the CDR printing position.

CDR guide is completed.

CDR guide

Sensor retaining ribCDR mode sensor

PERATING PRINCIPLES Printer Mechanism Operating Principles

ERATION SEQUENCE OVERVIEW (CDR MECHANISM)

en the PG position is switched to the CDR guide drive position by the APG chanism, the CDR Link arm which is interlocked with the Left PG cam releases the k of the CDR Planetary gear. In this manner the driving force of the PF motor is nsmitted to the CDR guide.

Figure 2-27. Switching of CDR Link arm and Planetary gear (When lifted)

The state of the CDR guide is contrmisalignment with the CDR guide isto correct the misalignment by movof the flag.

The operational sequences of the CD

Lifting the CDR guide (CDR p

1. The PG position is switched to mechanism to release the lock o2-27.“Switching of CDR Link a

2. The PF motor rotates countercloperation, the PF motor load is to High state.

Figure 2-28. CDR gu

3. When the CDR mode sensor gospecified number of steps to moWith this step the lifting of the

Left side

CDR Link arm

CDR Planetary gear

CDR Link arm Left PG camCDR Planetary gearLeft side

Left PG cam

CDR guide positionCDR Planetary gear lockedEJ frame

Left side

Page 48: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

O 48

4.

ransporting path at CDR printing

ASF position)

the CDR guide drive position by APG mechanism etary gear.

F motor moves the CDR guide downward. During d is monitored. At this time the CDR mode sensor

es to Low state, the PF motor rotates decelerating f steps to move the CDR guide to the ASF position. the CDR guide is completed.

R guide is completed, the PF motor rotates mber of steps to release the pressure of the CDR

sition is switched to the PG(-) by the APG CDR Planetary gear is locked so that the driving nsmitted.

EJ rollerPF roller

CDR guide

Carriage

sensor

PERATING PRINCIPLES Printer Mechanism Operating Principles

Figure 2-29. CDR guide/mode sensor at completion of lift upAfter the lifting the CDR guide is completed, the PF motor rotates clockwise a specified number of steps to release the pressure of the CDR Planetary gear. Then the PG position is switched to the PG(-) by the APG mechanism. In this manner the CDR Planetary gear is locked so that the driving force of the PF motor is not transmitted.

Figure 2-30. Tray t

Moving down the CDR guide (

1. The PG position is switched to to release the lock of CDR Plan

2. The clockwise rotation of the Pthis operation, the PF motor loagoes to High state.

3. When the CDR mode sensor goclockwise a specified number oWith this step the moving down

4. After the moving down the CDcounterclockwise a specified nuPlanetary gear. Then the PG pomechanism. In this manner the force of the PF motor is not tra

CDR guideEJ frame

Left side

Action at CDR guide lifting

CDR mode sensor

Sensor retaining rib

PE

Page 49: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

O 49

2.Th

2.2ThBoWhlevtran(AP

ThSeemo

No

airtightness inside the cap by capping the surface rbed by the Pump unit. absorbing position on the edge of HP side, the at the cap goes up and adhere to the head.

age Lock unit and the Wiper unit. When the ion/wiping position, the carriage lock set/reset and cted by the driving force of the PF motor.

tor drive and the Cap unit is shown below.

kwise/counterclockwise is defined seen from the output

motor drive and the Cap unitn* Carriage lock/Wiper operation

Carriage lock setWiper Up

Carriage lock resetWiper Down

PERATING PRINCIPLES Printer Mechanism Operating Principles

2.6 Ink Systeme Ink system consists of the mechanisms shown below.

Figure 2-31. External view of the Ink system

.6.1 Pump Unite Pump unit is provided to absorb ink from the Printhead or Cap unit.th of the Pump unit and the paper feeding mechanism are driven by the ASF motor. en driving the Pump unit, the carriage is moved to its home position and the change er is switched to the ink system side so that the driving force of the ASF motor is smitted to the Pump unit. See Figure 2-8.“Switching of Forced Clutch G)”(p.30).

e relationship between the ASF motor and the Pump unit is shown below. Table 2-8. “ASF motor specifications” (p.34) for the specifications of the ASF tor.

te "*": The rotational direction clockwise/counterclockwise is defined seen from the output shaft side.

2.2.6.2 Cap UnitThe Cap unit is provided to keep theof the printhead when the ink is absoWhen the carriage unit moves to thecarriage causes the cap to slide so th

Also the Cap unit contains the Carricarriage is in the carriage lock positwiper set/ reset operations are condu

The relationship between the PF mo

Note "*": The rotational direction clocshaft side.

Table 2-11. ASF motor drive and the Pump unit ASF motor* drive direction Pump unit operation

Clockwise Absorb

Counterclockwise Release

Wiper

Cap

Carriage lock

Cap unit

Pump unit

Table 2-12. PF PF motor* drive directio

Clockwise

Counterclockwise

Page 50: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

O 50

2.ThetcFo

nents of the Scanner Carriage Unit

h brush. It drives the Carriage unit through the timing ition and speed information obtained by the CR

ations of the motor and the encoder.

CR motor specificationsSpecifications

h brushes (Mabuchi RK-370CA-09900)

ltage) ± 5% (voltage applied to driver)

ro company product)

CR Encoder specificationsSpecifications

V

e B channel digital output (TTL)

oltage: 2.4VDC (min.)ltage: 0.6VDC (max.)

h

photo interrupter

CIS Boarde Unit

LED

PERATING PRINCIPLES Printer Mechanism Operating Principles

2.7 Scanner Unite Scanner unit consists of the Scanner Carriage unit, CR motor, CR encoder sensor, . See Figure 2-4.“Motors/sensors layout (scanner unit)”(p.27).llowing describes the mechanism of the components.

Scanner Carriage Unit

The Scanner Carriage unit consists of the CIS board, the Rod Lens Array, and the LED (light source). The following explains about each of the components.

CIS Board

The CIS Board contains the sensing elements that are placed across the entire width of an original. The sensing elements, which does not install a color filter, read an original through the Rod Lens Array by turning on red, green, and blue light emitting diodes (LEDs) alternately. It is not the CIS Board but the Main Board that converts the analog light signal read by the Rod Lens Array into digital signal.

Rod Lens Array

A number of rod-shaped lenses, which are arranged on the sensing elements, are also placed across the entire width of an original. The light source (LEDs) emits light, and these lenses read the light reflected off the original, and pass the information to the sensing elements. Compared to conventional CCD method, this optical system allows the focal length (distance between sensor and image scanned) to be shallow. Therefore, an original to be scanned should be brought close to the document glass. The optical system, in addition, is 1:1, (there is no optical reduction or enlargement) and this results in a scanner offering the solid performance in terms of accuracy.

LED

Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 use three color LEDs (red, green, and blue) to illuminate the line to be scanned in the document. Unlike cold cathode fluorescent lamp used in CCD method, usage of LEDs requires no warm-up time and allows the CIS to be highly power efficient.

Figure 2-32. Compo

CR Motor & CR Encoder

The CR motor is a DC motor witbelt according to the carriage posencoder.The following shows the specific

Table 2-13.Item

Type DC motor wit

Voltage 42V (direct vo

Drive Method PWM

Driver A6651 (Alleg

Table 2-14. Item

Power supply voltages 3.3VDC ± 0.2

Output waveform Phase A, phas

Output levelHigh output vLow output vo

Resolution 180 pulses/inc

Signal detection section Transmissive

Rod Lens Array

Scanner Carriag

CIS

Page 51: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

O 51

2.Thfol

2.

r mode, the following operation is performed to tion.

oltage downrent of the Optical sensorf the motorsSIC

consumption modeply circuitnter motoruitf & releases the excitation of the scanner motoror offend mode

PERATING PRINCIPLES Electrical Circuits Operating Principles

3 Electrical Circuits Operating Principlese electric circuits of the Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 consists of the lowing boards.

3.1 FeaturesThe parallel printing is realized by the adoption of SOC06H which has one main processor and six processors for image processing

The wide memory access is realized by mounting the 166Mhz DDR1-SDRAM on the local side as the image processing memory.

The ASIC with a built-in CPU is adopted for card controlling. The connection method with SOC is changed from the previous CPU bus connection to the USB Host connection to improve the card access speed. This IC has the three-ports USB2.0 HUB function and using one port for the external USB Host I/F realizes the USB2.0 Host function.

Installing the IC which adopts to Multi-common reduces the number of printing paths so that the printing process time is shortened.

The costs for the logic power supply and the drive of motors are reduced by installing A6651, a motor driver with a built-in power source.

The MW buffer size is reduced to one-third compared to that of Stylus Photo RX700 by installing UBEC (Ultra Block Encode).

The color LCD (2.5 inch TFT display) is installed as standard.

When shifting to low powereduce the power consump

• Turns the power supply v• Intercepts the optical cur• Stops the drive circuits o• Stops the UDL clock in A• Shifts the CPU core low • High efficient power sup• Non-excitation of the pri• Stops the head drive circ• Turns the CIS scanner of• Turns the preview monit• Shifts to Card ASIC susp

Figure 2-33. Main boards and typesName Type

Main board C686MAIN

Power supply board C685PSB/PSE

Panel board C686PNL+C685PNL-B

Card board C685STG

Page 52: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

O 52

2.

Not

M

C

P

L

IS

PERATING PRINCIPLES Electrical Circuits Operating Principles

3.2 Circuit Board Components

e *: The Flash ROM will be changed to Mask ROM during the printer is in mass production.

Figure 2-34. Circuit board componentsBoard Specifications

ain board

System

Logic circuit(ASIC with a built-in CPU, Flash ROM*, Serial Flash ROM, DDR-DRAM)Interface circuit (USB2.0 Device , USB2.0 Host)EEPROMReset IC2.5inch color LCD I/FPanel I/F

Power supplyRegulator circuitPower switch circuitOver-voltage protect circuit

Printer

Motor control/drive circuit (PF, CR, ASF, ASF_SUB)Head control/drive circuit Sensor circuit (PE, APG phase, Front ASF Retard Home, Rear ASF phase, Rear ASF Home, CDR mode, Duplex unit, Ink end, PW)

Scanner Scanner I/F circuit Scanner motor control/drive circuit

ard board Logic circuit (Card control IC)USB HOST I/F circuit

anel boardPower switch circuit Switch circuit LED circuit

CD moduleLCD Control circuit 2.5inch LCD PanelSDRAM

N boardCCDAFEClock driverRegulator circuit

Page 53: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

O 53

2.

7

CR Motor

ASF Motor

PrintHead

CR encoder Sensor

ASF Sub Motor

PF Motor

Scanner Motor

7

8

66

0

9

8

PF encoder Sensor2

CR contact Module

PWSensor

3

ASF encoder Sensor

PE Sensor

Duplex Unit Sensor

Front ASF Retard Home Sensor

Rear ASF Home Sensor

Rear ASF Position Sensor

APG Sensor

CDR mode Sensor

4 Cover Open Sensor

oard

PERATING PRINCIPLES Electrical Circuits Operating Principles

3.3 Main Board Circuit Block Diagram

Figure 2-35. Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 circuit block diagram

CN

CPU-ASIC(IC1)

DDR-DRAM(IC6)

Motor Driver(IC11)

Motor Driver(IC12)

EEPROM(IC4)

Reset IC(IC8)

USB2.0(CN1)

C686 PNL Board

C685 PNL-B Board

C685 PSB/PSE Board

CN4

LCD CN3

CN16

CN1

CN1

CNCN

CN1

CN

CN

Scanner encoder Sensor

CN1

CN19

CN20

CN5

CIS ModuleHead Driver

(IC7)AFE(IC3)

CN1

AddressData

AddressData

CN1

CN11

Sub B

Serial FLASH ROM (IC9)

USB Host(CN2)

Card Slot CF (CN7)

Card Slot MS/SD/xD/MMC (CN8)

C685 STG Board CN2

FLASHROM(IC2)

Page 54: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

O (PFP) 54

2. ion (PFP)

In per Feed Profile (PFP) Correction system. The ove

Co by a specified scanner. The created correction va

RemarksResolutions (dpi)

720 x 720 ---

720 x 720 With BRS

720 x 360 Without BRS

CP

PERATING PRINCIPLES Banding Reduction System (BRS) / Paper Feed Amount Profile Correction

4 Banding Reduction System (BRS) / Paper Feed Amount Profile CorrectOverview

order to ensure high print quality and high print speed, this product incorporates the Banding Reduction System (BRS) and Parview of them is described in the table below.

Adjustment/Correction method

rrection values of the BRS and the PFP are automatically calculated when a pattern printed by the printer is scannedlues are stored into the serial flash ROM on the main board, and applied when printing in the target print mode.

Table 2-15. Overview of BRS and PFP

Type SummaryTarget Print Mode

Paper Type Paper Size

BRS

Conventional models perform overlapping printing (2-path or 4-path print) to reduce banding problem. Printers that incorporate the Banding Reducing System do not perform the overlapping printing. They carry out 1-path printing correcting ink drop amount for each raster mode in order to avoid making a gap between each path (printed line). This enables to achieve both high print quality (less banding) and high print speed.

Ultra Glossy Photo PaperPremium Glossy Photo Paper

Glossy Photo PaperPremium Semigloss Photo Paper

4 x 6 inch(102 x 152 mm)

PFP

In the conventional method to improve paper feed accuracy, the adjustment value is calculated based on a value obtained at a certain point of paper. Therefore, correcting the total paper feed amount (from when paper is fed and to when finishing printing) was impossible. The Paper Feed Amount Profile Correction offers more precise control over the paper feeding. Paper feed errors are measured at various points and a correction value is calculated for each of the points. This enables to ensure print quality in the target print mode.

Ultra Glossy Photo PaperPremium Glossy Photo Paper

Glossy Photo PaperPremium Semigloss Photo Paper

4 x 6 inch(102 x 152 mm)

HECKOINT

For information on how to carry out the BRS and PFP, See Chapter 5 ADJUSTMENT.

Page 55: RX680 Service Manual

C H A P T E R

3T BLESHOOTING

ROU
Page 56: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

T 56

3.Thsymor outTro

3.Whfor

” ( p. 26 ) for the motors and sensors mounting positions. NG PRINCIPLES” (p.25) for more information on the

or Resistance & Check PointsConnector Check Points Resistance

ub board: CN4 Pin 1 & 2 19.7Ω ± 10%

in board: CN17 Pin 1 & 2 12.2Ω ± 10%

ub board: CN5 Pin 1 & 2 21.9Ω ± 10%

ub board: CN3 Pin 1 & 2 64.7Ω ± 15%

in board: CN18 Pin 1 & 2 T.B.D

. Sensors Check Pointsnnector Signal level Sensor Status

: CN11 Pin1 & Pin3

2.4V or more Detecting paper

0.4V or less No paper

: CN8 Pin1 & Pin3

2.4V or more PG position

0.4V or less Out of PG position

rd: CN13 Pin1 & Pin2

2.4V or more High position (CDR print)/ Low position (ASF print)

0.4V or less Out of above positions (CDR guide is moving)

: CN9 Pin1 & Pin3

2.4V or more Front Retard is in upper position

0.4V or less Front Retard is in home position

: CN6 Pin1 & Pin3

2.4V or more Rear ASF Hopper is out of home position

0.4V or less Rear ASF Hopper is in home position

: CN7 Pin1 & Pin3

2.4V or more Rear ASF Hopper is at arbitrary position

0.4V or less Rear ASF Hopper is between the preset positions (moving)

: CN13 Pin1 & Pin2

2.4V or more No duplex unit

0.4V or less Duplex unit is installed

rd: CN14 Pin1 & Pin2

2.4V or more Case is open

0.4V or less Case is closed

ROUBLESHOOTING Overview

1 Overviewis chapter describes how to troubleshoot problems with LCD indications and by

ptom.See the following sections to identify and troubleshoot problems, and repair replace the faulty component as necessary referring to Chapter 4. Be sure to carry required adjustments referring to Chapter 5 after the repair or replacement. ubleshooting information on the motors and sensors is also provided.

Figure 3-1. Troubleshooting Flowchart

1.1 Troubleshooting on Motors and Sensorsen the motor or sensor is suspect of causing the problem, check the motor or sensor

any abnormality referring to the following tables.

Note : See “2.1.2 Motors and SensorsRefer to Chapter 2 “OPERATIsensors status.

Start

Troubleshooting with LCD indications or by symptom

Repair or replacement of part/unit

Reassembly and adjustment

End

Table 3-1. MotMotor Name

CR Motor (DC motor) S

PF Motor (DC motor) Ma

ASF Motor (DC motor) S

ASF Sub Motor (DC motor) S

CR Motor (scanner) (DC motor) Ma

Table 3-2Sensor Name Co

PE Sensor Sub boardBetween

APG Phase Sensor Sub boardBetween

CDR Mode Sensor Main boaBetween

FP (front position) Sensor Sub boardBetween

RH (rear home) Sensor Sub boardBetween

RP (rear position) Sensor Sub boardBetween

Duplex Unit Sensor Sub boardBetween

Case Open Sensor Main boaBetween

Page 57: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

T 57

3.Th

3.ThIf t

Reference

C te with the Table 3-4, “Communication Error Troubleshooting,” (p. 59)

M ermined limit. Chapter 5 “ADJUSTMENT” (p.151), Chapter 6 “MAINTENANCE” (p.173)

FA Table 3-5, “Fatal Error Troubleshooting,” (p. 60)

In s.s.t be made.

Table 3-6, “Ink Cartridge Error/Ink Cover Open Error/Ink Out Error Troubleshooting,” (p. 69)

In

Em

Pa Table 3-7, “Paper Jam Error Troubleshooting,” (p. 70)

Pa

Pa

ROUBLESHOOTING Error/Warning Indications

2 Error/Warning Indicationsis sections explains about error/warning messages displayed on the LCD.

2.1 List of Error Indicationse following table lists the error messages displayed on the LCD with their possible cause and reference page for troubleshooting. he error or warning indication you face is not found in the table, refer to the Users Guide.

Table 3-3. Error Messages and Possible Cause

Error Name LCD Message Possible Cause

ommunication Error --- The printer cannot normally communicacomputer.

aintenance Error Waste ink pad in the printer is saturated. Contact your dealer to replace it.

The waste ink level reaches to the predet

TAL Error A printer error has occurred. Turn off the printer and turn it on again.Please see your documentation.

A mechanical error has occurred.

k cartridge detection Error BLack: XXXX*1

Color: XXXX*1

...........................Ink cartridges cannot be recognized. Make sure ink cartridges are correctly installed.

The printer could not detect the cartridgeThe printer detected non-Epson cartridgeWriting to/reading from the CSIC canno

k Cover Open Error The ink cartridge cover is open. Open the scanner unit and close the ink cartridge cover. Press Ok to continue.

The ink cartridge cover is open.

pty cartridge error BLack: XXXX*1

Color: XXXX*1

...........................Press the OK button to replace the cartridges.

The ink cartridge has run out of ink.

per jam (Rear) Paper jam in the rear feeder. Open the scanner unit and remove the jammed paper. Press the Start button and eject the jammed paper. Please see your documentation.

A paper jam has occurred.

per jam (Front) Paper jam. Open the rear cover and remove the paper. Press the Start button and eject the jammed paper. Please see your documentation.

per jam (CDR) CD/CVD error. Press the Start button. If the error does not clear, remove the tray by hand.

Page 58: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

T 58

No

D at one time.---

Pa r. Table 3-8, “Paper Out Error Troubleshooting,” (p. 74)

Pa

C R tray. Table 3-9, “CDR Tray Error Troubleshooting,” (p. 76)

C does not match with Table 3-10, “CDR Guide Error Troubleshooting,” (p. 77)

Sc er mechanism. Table 3-20, “Scanner Errors at User Level,” (p. 84), Table 3-21, “Observation of Trouble and Reference for Remedy,” (p. 84)

Sc canner unit is open.

D plex unit. Table 3-28, “Duplex Unit Open Error,” (p. 86)

Pa plex unit. Table 3-29, “Duplex Unit Paper Jam Error,” (p. 86)

e Reference

ROUBLESHOOTING Error/Warning Indications

te : The “XXXX” represents the part number of the Ink Cartridge.

ouble Feed Error Multi-page feed error. Remove and reload the paper, then press the Start button.

Multiple sheets of paper were fed

per Out Error (Rear) Paper out in the rear feeder. Load paper and press the Start button. The printer could not feed the pape

per Out Error (Front) Paper out in the front paper cassette. Load paper and press the Start button.

DR Tray Error The CD/DVD tray is set incorrectly. Please correct, then press the Start button.

The printer could not detect the CD

DR Guide Error The CD/DVD guide is in the wrong position. Press the CD Print Tray button to print on paper.The CD/DVD guide is in the wrong position. Press the CD Print Tray button to print on CD/DVDs.

The specified paper feed operationthe current CDR guide position.

anner Error A scanner error has occurred. See your documentation. An error has occurred in the scann

anner Open Error Close the scanner unit. Printing was attempted while the s

uplex Unit Open Error The Auto Duplexer has been removed. Reattach it. The printer could not detect the du

per jam (Duplex Unit) Paper jam. Remove the Auto Duplexer and clear the paper jam. A paper jam has occurred in the du

Table 3-3. Error Messages and Possible Cause

Error Name LCD Message Possible Caus

Page 59: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

T 59

3.Th creen of the printer driver, and troubleshoot fol mbly”.

3.

Remedy Reference

nnect the Panel FFC correctly.Main board: CN4

“4.2.5 Panel Unit/Upper Housing” ( p. 96 ) / “4.4.3 Disassembling the Panel Unit” ( p. 108 )

place the Panel FFC.

place the Panel Board.

nnect the cable correctly.Main board: CN5 “4.5.2 Power

Supply Unit” ( p. 113 )place the Power Supply Unit.

f this does not solve the problem, replace the Main Board.

rrectly connect the printer and the mputer with USB cable.

---

tall the correct printer driver. ---

rite the correct name to the EEPROM ng the Initial Setting menu of the justment Program.

“5.2 Adjustment by Using Adjustment Program” ( p. 157 )

ROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting

3 Troubleshootinge following tables describes troubleshooting with error messages. Check the error indication displayed on the LCD or on the slowing the corresponding table. If any faulty part or component is found, replace it referring to Chapter 4 “Disassembly/Asse

3.1 Troubleshooting with Error IndicationsTable 3-4. Communication Error Troubleshooting

Occurrence Timing Symptom Faulty Part/

Part Name Check Point

At power-on The printer does not operate at all.

Panel Board/Panel FFC

1. Is the Panel FFC properly connected to the Panel Board and the Main Board?

1. Co

2. Is the Panel FFC damaged? 2. Re

3. Is the Panel Board damaged? 3. Re

Power Supply Unit

1. Is the Power Supply Unit cable properly connected to the Main Board?

1. Co

2. Is the Power Supply Unit or the power code damaged?

2. Re*I

USB Cable 1. Is the USB cable properly connected to the printer and the computer?

1. Coco

Printer Driver 1. Is the printer driver for Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690?

1. Ins

Main Board

1. Is the model name written to the EEPROM on the Main Board correct?

1. WusiAd

Page 60: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

T 60

Remedy Reference

nnect the cable correctly. “4.5.7 APG Assy/Sub Board/ASF Encoder/Retard ASF Assy” ( p. 120 )

rrectly connect the motor relay cable the connectors on the boards.

place the CR Motor with a new one. “4.5.12 CR Motor” ( p. 129 )

place the CR Encoder with a new one.“4.5.13 Carriage Assy” ( p. 130 )rrectly connect the Head FFC.

tall the CR Scale correctly.

“4.5.5 CR Scale” ( p. 117 )

ipe any dirt off the surface of the CR ale.If this does not work, replace the Scale with a new one.

place the CR Scale with a new one.

ean the Main Frame and lubricate it as cified.

“6.1.3 Lubrication” ( p. 175 )

ean the CR Shaft and lubricate it as cified.

“6.1.3 Lubrication” ( p. 175 )

tall the Timing Belt correctly. “4.5.13 Carriage Assy” ( p. 130 ) / “4.5.12 CR Motor” ( p. 129 )

ROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting

Table 3-5. Fatal Error Troubleshooting

Occurrence Timing Symptom Faulty Part/

Part Name Check Point

At power-on

• The CR Motor does not move at all. CR Motor

1. Is the CR Motor cable properly connected to connector CN4 on the Sub Board?

1. Co

2. Is the motor relay cable properly connected to connector CN1 on the Sub Board and connector CN16 on the Main Board?

2. Coto

3. Does the CR Motor operate normally? 3. Re

• The Carriage Assy hits against the right side of the Main Frame.

CR Encoder1. Is the CR Encoder damaged? 1. Re

2. Is the FFC properly connected to the connector on the CR Encoder?

2. Co

CR Scale

1. Does the CR Scale properly run through the slit of the CR Encoder?

1. Ins

2. Is the CR Scale surface clean? 2. WScCR

3. Is the CR Scale damaged? 3. Re

• The Carriage Assy moves too slow.

Main Frame1. Is the Main Frame free of dirt, and adequately

lubricated?1. Cl

spe

CR Shaft1. Is the CR Shaft free of dirt, and adequately

lubricated?1. Cl

spe

Timing Belt

1. Is the Timing Belt correctly attached? 1. Ins

Page 61: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

T 61

nnect the cable correctly. “4.4.1 Main Board Assy” ( p. 106 )

place the PF Motor with a new one “4.5.11 PF Motor” ( p. 128 )

nnect the PF Encoder FFC correctly. “4.4.1 Main Board Assy” ( p. 106 ) / “4.5.10 PF Encoder” ( p. 127 )

place the PF Encoder with a new one. “4.5.10 PF Encoder” ( p. 127 )

ipe any dirt off the surface of the PF ale.If this does not work, replace the Scale with a new one.

“4.5.22 Paper Guide Front & EJ Roller Assy/PF Roller Assy” ( p. 145 )place the PF Scale with a new one.

Remedy Reference

ROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting

At power-on • The PF Roller makes a quick turn and then the error occurs.

PF Motor

1. Is the PF Motor cable properly connected to connector CN17 on the Main Board?

1. Co

2. Does the PF Motor operate normally? 2. Re

PF Encoder

1. Is the PF Encoder FFC properly connected to connector CN12 on the Main Board and the connector on the encoder?

1. Co

2. Is the PF Encoder damaged? 2. Re

PF Scale

1. Is the PF Scale surface clean? 1. WScPF

2. Is the PF Scale damaged? 2. Re

Table 3-5. Fatal Error Troubleshooting

Occurrence Timing Symptom Faulty Part/

Part Name Check Point

Page 62: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

T 62

tach the extension spring 0.8 correctly.

“4.5.19 Ink System” ( p. 142 )tall the Carriage Lock correctly.

tach the extension spring 2.36 rrectly.

“4.5.16 Rear ASF Assy/Change Lever” ( p. 135 )

Remedy Reference

ROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting

At power-on• The CR Unit hits against the

Change Lever that is being locked during the power-on sequence.

Ink System

1. Is the extension spring 0.8 of the Ink System disengaged?

1. At

2. Is the Carriage Lock correctly attached? 2. Ins

Rear ASF Assy

1. Is the extension spring 2.36 of the Change Lever disengaged?

1. Atco

Table 3-5. Fatal Error Troubleshooting

Occurrence Timing Symptom Faulty Part/

Part Name Check Point

Ink System

Extension Spring 0.8

Carriage Lock

Ink System

[Right rear]

Extension Spring

Change Lever

ASF Motor

Page 63: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

T 63

tall the CDR Link Lever and the CDR netary gears correctly.

“4.5.9 EJ Frame Assy/CDR Guide Assy” ( p. 124 )

place the PF Timing Belt with a new e.

“4.5.11 PF Motor” ( p. 128 )/Chapter 5 “ADJUSTMENT” (p.151)

tall the PF Motor correctly and adjust tension of the PF Timing Belt perly.

stall the Left/Right Upper Paper ides correctly.

“4.5.14 Paper Guide Upper L/R” ( p. 133 )

nnect the cable correctly. “4.5.7 APG Assy/Sub Board/ASF Encoder/Retard ASF Assy” ( p. 120 )

rrectly connect the motor relay cable the connectors on the boards.

place the ASF Motor with a new one. “4.5.20 ASF Motor Assy” ( p. 143 )

place the ASF Motor with a new one.

place the ASF Motor with a new one.

Remedy Reference

ROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting

At power-on

• An abnormal noise sounds when the PF Motor drives and then the error is displayed.

CDR Link Lever

1. Are the CDR Link Lever and the CDR planetary gears properly engaged and installed?

1. Inspla

• The PF Roller and the EJ Roller do not rotate normally.

PF Motor/PF Timing Belt

1. Is the PF Timing Belt damaged? 1. Reon

2. Is the PF Motor properly installed, and does the PF Timing Belt have a proper tension?

2. Insthepro

• The CR Unit hits against the Left and Right Upper Paper Guides during the power-on sequence.

Left/Right Upper Paper Guide

1. Are the springs of the Left/Right Upper Paper Guides disengaged?

1. InGu

• The ASF Motor does not operate at all. ASF Motor

1. Is the ASF Motor cable properly connected to connector CN5 on the Sub Board?

1. Co

2. Is the motor relay cable properly connected to connector CN1 on the Sub Board and connector CN16 on the Main Board?

2. Coto

3. Is the ASF Scale surface clean? 3. Re

4. Is the ASF Scale damaged? 4. Re

5. Does the ASF Motor operate normally? 5. Re

Table 3-5. Fatal Error Troubleshooting

Occurrence Timing Symptom Faulty Part/

Part Name Check Point

CDR Planetary

CDR Link Arm

CDR Link Lever

EJ Roller Assy

Page 64: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

T 64

nnect the cable correctly.“4.5.7 APG Assy/Sub Board/ASF Encoder/Retard ASF Assy” ( p. 120 )

rrectly connect the sensor relay cable C) to the connectors on the boards.

place the ASF Encoder with a new e.

nnect the cable correctly.

“4.5.16 Rear ASF Assy/Change Lever” ( p. 135 )

rrectly connect the motor relay cable the connectors on the boards.

place the ASF Sub Motor with a new e.

tall the RASF planetary gear rrectly.

“4.5.16 Rear ASF Assy/Change Lever” ( p. 135 )

Remedy Reference

ROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting

At power-on

• The ASF Motor makes a quick turn and then the error occurs. ASF Encoder

1. Is the ASF Encoder cable properly connected to connector CN10 on the Sub Board?

1. Co

2. Is the sensor relay cable (FFC) properly connected to connector CN2 on the Sub Board and connector CN11 on the Main Board?

2. Co(FF

3. Is the ASF Encoder damaged? 3. Reon

• The ASF Sub Motor does not operate at all. ASF Sub Motor

1. Is the ASF Sub Motor cable properly connected to connector CN3 on the Sub Board?

1. Co

2. Is the motor relay cable properly connected to connector CN1 on the Sub Board and connector CN16 on the Main Board?

2. Coto

3. Does the ASF Sub Motor operate normally? 3. Reon

• The Rear ASF cannot be reset (the Hopper does not operate) Rear ASF Assy

1. Is the RASF planetary gear correctly engaged with the cam of the spur gear 34.4?

1. Insco

Table 3-5. Fatal Error Troubleshooting

Occurrence Timing Symptom Faulty Part/

Part Name Check Point

ASF Sub Motor

[Right side]Planetary

GearSpur Gear

Cam

Page 65: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

T 65

nnect the cable correctly.

“4.5.17 ASF Sub Motor/RH Sensor/RP Sensor” ( p. 137 )

rrectly connect the sensor relay cable C) to the connectors on the boards.

nnect the cable correctly.

rrectly connect the sensor relay cable C) to the connectors on the boards.

nnect the cable correctly.“4.5.16 Rear ASF Assy/Change Lever” ( p. 135 )

rrectly connect the sensor relay cable C) to the connectors on the boards.

tall the RASF planetary gear rrectly.

“4.5.16 Rear ASF Assy/Change Lever” ( p. 135 )

Remedy Reference

ROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting

At power-on

• The error is displayed after up/down movements of the Hopper

Rear Position Sensor

1. Is the RP (rear position) Sensor cable properly connected to connector CN6 on the Sub Board?

1. Co

2. Is the sensor relay cable (FFC) properly connected to connector CN2 on the Sub Board and connector CN11 on the Main Board?

2. Co(FF

Rear Home Sensor

1. Is the RP (rear home) Sensor cable properly connected to connector CN7 on the Sub Board?

1. Co

2. Is the sensor relay cable (FFC) properly connected to connector CN2 on the Sub Board and connector CN11 on the Main Board?

2. Co(FF

• The Front ASF cannot be reset (the Front Retard Roller is kept lifted)

Front Position Sensor

1. Is the Front Position Sensor cable properly connected to connector CN9 on the Sub Board?

1. Co

2. Is the sensor relay cable (FFC) properly connected to connector CN2 on the Sub Board and connector CN11 on the Main Board?

2. Co(FF

• The Front ASF cannot be reset (the Front Retard Roller is kept lifted) Rear ASF Assy

1. Is the RASF planetary gear correctly engaged with the cam of the spur gear 34.4?

1. Insco

Table 3-5. Fatal Error Troubleshooting

Occurrence Timing Symptom Faulty Part/

Part Name Check Point

ASF Sub Motor

[Right side]Planetary

GearSpur Gear

Cam

Page 66: RX680 Service Manual

E Revision B

T 66

stall the APG Assy correctly aligning e phase.

“4.5.7 APG Assy/Sub Board/ASF Encoder/Retard ASF Assy” ( p. 120 )

stall the transmissive combination gear rrectly.

eplace the APG Assy with a new one.

eplace the left PG cam with a new one.

“4.5.13 Carriage Assy” ( p. 130 )

Remedy Reference

PSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690

ROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting

At power-onChanging APG

• The error is displayed when the printer is resetting or changing the APG.

APG Assy

1. Is the APG Assy correctly installed? 1. Inth

2. Is the transmissive combination gear 20.8, 11.5 properly engaged?

2. Inco

APG Phase Sensor 1. Is the APG Phase Sensor damaged? 1. R

CR Shaft

1. Is the left cam damaged? 1. R

Table 3-5. Fatal Error Troubleshooting

Occurrence Timing Symptom Faulty Part/

Part Name Check Point

[HP side]

Transmissive Combination

Gear

APG Assy

Left PG Cam

CR Shaft

Page 67: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

T 67

nnect the cable correctly. “4.5.7 APG Assy/Sub Board/ASF Encoder/Retard ASF Assy” ( p. 120 )

rrectly connect the motor relay cable the connectors on the boards.

place the ASF Motor with a new one. “4.5.20 ASF Motor Assy” ( p. 143 )

place the ASF Motor with a new one.

place the ASF Motor with a new one.

tall the torsion spring of the CDR k Lever correctly.

“4.5.22 Paper Guide Front & EJ Roller Assy/PF Roller Assy” ( p. 145 )

tall the APG planetary gear correctly.

“4.5.20 ASF Motor Assy” ( p. 143 )

Remedy Reference

ROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting

At power-onChanging APG

• The error is displayed when the printer is resetting or changing the APG.

ASF Motor

1. Is the ASF Motor cable properly connected to connector CN5 on the Sub Board?

1. Co

2. Is the motor relay cable properly connected to connector CN1 on the Sub Board and connector CN16 on the Main Board?

2. Coto

3. Is the ASF Scale surface clean? 3. Re

4. Is the ASF Scale damaged? 4. Re

5. Does the ASF Motor operate normally? 5. Re

CDR Link Arm

1. Is the torsion spring of the CDR Link Arm properly attached?

1. InsLin

APG Planetary Gear

1. Is the APG planetary gear correctly engaged? 1. Ins

Table 3-5. Fatal Error Troubleshooting

Occurrence Timing Symptom Faulty Part/

Part Name Check Point

CDR Link Arm

Torsion Spring

[Left rear]

APG Planetary Gear

Spur Gear 11.2

[Right side]Transmissive

Combination Gear (APG)

Ink System

Page 68: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

T 68

place the Printhead with a new one. “4.5.6 Printhead” ( p. 118 )

rrectly connect the Head FFC. “4.4.1 Main Board Assy” ( p. 106 )

place the Main Board with a new one. “4.4.1 Main Board Assy” ( p. 106 )

Remedy Reference

ROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting

Any time Symptom other than those described on the previous pages

Printhead1. Is the Printhead damaged? 1. Re

PW Sensor1. Is the Head FFC properly connected to connector

CN10 on the Main Board?1. Co

Main Board1. Check the Main Board for damage. 1. Re

Table 3-5. Fatal Error Troubleshooting

Occurrence Timing Symptom Faulty Part/

Part Name Check Point

Page 69: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

T 69

ooting

Remedy Reference

place the Ink Cartridge with a new e.

---

rrectly connect the Head FFC. “4.5.13 Carriage Assy” ( p. 130 ) / “4.4.1 Main Board Assy” ( p. 106 )

place the CSIC Assy with a new one.

“4.5.6 Printhead” ( p. 118 )place the CSIC Assy with a new one.

ROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting

Table 3-6. Ink Cartridge Error/Ink Cover Open Error/Ink Out Error Troublesh

Occurrence Timing Symptom Faulty Part/

Part Name Check Point

At power-onThe error is displayed after the printer detects that the Carriage Assy is in the home position.

Ink Cartridge

1. Is the memory chip on the ink cartridge disconnected or damaged?

1. Reon

Head FFC

1. Is the Head FFC properly connected to connector CN6, CN7, CN8, CN9, CN10 on the Printhead, Head Board, CR Encoder, and the Main Board?

1. Co

Head Board

1. Is the CSIC terminals damaged? 1. Re

2. Is the Head Board damaged? 2. Re

Memory Chip

Ink Cartridge

CSIC terminal

CSIC ASSY

CSIC ASSY

[Rear]

Head Board

Page 70: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

T 70

Remedy Reference

tall the Rear ASF Assy correctly.

“4.5.16 Rear ASF Assy/Change Lever” ( p. 135 )

tall the Paper Back Lever and the sion spring 6.45 correctly.

rrectly attach the extension spring 8 on the backside of the Retard Roller sy.

ean the rollers. “Table 3-11. Troubleshooting Paper Feed Problems” ( p. 78 )

tall the Front ASF Cover Assy rrectly.

“4.2.4 Front ASF Cover Assy” ( p. 96 )

tall the Paper Guide Bank Assy rrectly.

“4.5.23 Paper Guide Bank Assy” ( p. 149 )

ean the rollers. “Table 3-11. Troubleshooting Paper Feed Problems” ( p. 78 )

ROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting

Table 3-7. Paper Jam Error Troubleshooting

Occurrence Timing Symptom Faulty Part/

Part Name Check Point

Any timePaper feed operation is performed normally, but the paper is not fed inside the printer.

Rear ASF Assy

1. Is the Rear ASF Assy correctly installed? 1. Ins

2. Does the Paper Back Lever operate normally during the paper feed operation?

2. Instor

3. Does the Retard Roller Assy operate normally during the paper feed operation?

3. Co1.9As

4. Are there any micro pearl paper dust or greasy dirt attached on the surface of the LD Roller and the Retard Roller?

4. Cl

Front ASF Cover Assy

1. Is the Front ASF Cover Assy correctly installed? 1. Insco

Paper Guide Bank Assy

1. Is the Paper Guide Bank Assy correctly installed? 1. Insco

2. Are there any micro pearl paper dust or greasy dirt attached on the surface of the Front Retard Roller?

2. Cl

Retard Roller

Extension Spring

Rear ASF

Page 71: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

T 71

ean the rollers. “Table 3-11. Troubleshooting Paper Feed Problems” ( p. 78 )

rrectly connect the PE Sensor cable to connector on the Sub Board.

“4.4.1 Main Board Assy” ( p. 106 )/“4.5.7 APG Assy/Sub Board/ASF Encoder/Retard ASF Assy” ( p. 120 )

rrectly connect the sensor relay cable the connectors on the boards.

place the Rear Paper Guide with a w one.

“4.5.15 Paper Guide Rear/PE Sensor” ( p. 134 )

place the Rear Paper Guide with a w one.

rrectly attach the extension spring 8 on the backside of the Retard Roller sy.

“4.5.16 Rear ASF Assy/Change Lever” ( p. 135 )

Remedy Reference

ROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting

Any time

Paper feed operation is performed normally, but the paper is not fed inside the printer.

Idle Roller

1. Are there any micro pearl paper dust or greasy dirt attached on the surface of the Idle Roller?

1. Cl

PE Sensor

1. Is the PE Sensor cable properly connected to connector CN11 on the Sub Board?

1. Cothe

2. Is the sensor relay cable (FFC) properly connected to connector CN2 on the Sub Board and connector CN11 on the Main Board?

2. Coto

3. Is the lumiler protecting the PE Sensor contaminated?

3. Rene

4. Is the PE Sensor damaged? 4. Rene

Multiple sheets of paper are always fed at one time. Rear ASF Assy

1. Does the Retard Roller Assy operate normally during the paper feed operation?

1. Co1.9As

Table 3-7. Paper Jam Error Troubleshooting

Occurrence Timing Symptom Faulty Part/

Part Name Check Point

Lumiler(PE Sensor)

[Right rear]

Retard Roller

Extension Spring

Rear ASF

Page 72: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

T 72

rrectly connect the PE Sensor cable to connector on the Sub Board.

“4.4.1 Main Board Assy” ( p. 106 )/“4.5.7 APG Assy/Sub Board/ASF Encoder/Retard ASF Assy” ( p. 120 )

rrectly connect the sensor relay cable the connectors on the boards.

place the Rear Paper Guide with a w one.

“4.5.15 Paper Guide Rear/PE Sensor” ( p. 134 )

place the Rear Paper Guide with a w one.

Remedy Reference

ROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting

Any time The paper is ejected immediately after it is fed. PE Sensor

1. Is the PE Sensor cable properly connected to connector CN11 on the Sub Board?

1. Cothe

2. Is the sensor relay cable (FFC) properly connected to connector CN2 on the Sub Board and connector CN11 on the Main Board?

2. Coto

3. Is the lumiler protecting the PE Sensor contaminated?

3. Rene

4. Is the PE Sensor damaged? 4. Rene

Table 3-7. Paper Jam Error Troubleshooting

Occurrence Timing Symptom Faulty Part/

Part Name Check Point

Lumiler(PE Sensor)

[Right rear]

Page 73: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

T 73

No

rrectly attach the Waste Ink Pads on Front Paper Guide.

“4.5.22 Paper Guide Front & EJ Roller Assy/PF Roller Assy” ( p. 145 )

tall the Star Wheel Roller Holder rrectly.

“4.5.9 EJ Frame Assy/CDR Guide Assy” ( p. 124 )

tall the EJ Frame Assy correctly.

place the EJ Frame Assy with a new e.

tall the EJ Link Levers correctly. “4.5.9 EJ Frame Assy/CDR Guide Assy” ( p. 124 )

tall the Left/Right Upper Paper ides correctly.

“4.5.14 Paper Guide Upper L/R” ( p. 133 )

Remedy Reference

ROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting

te : * A paper jam may result in damaging the Printhead because the paper can rub against the Printhead surface.

Any time

The top edge of paper cannot run through between the EJ Roller and the Star Wheel Rollers.

Waste Ink Pad on the Front Paper

Guide

1. Is the Waste Ink Pads correctly attached on the Front Paper Guide?

1. Cothe

EJ Frame Assy*

1. Is the Star Wheel Roller Holder disengaged? 1. Insco

2. Is the EJ Frame Assy correctly installed? 2. Ins

3. Is the EJ Frame Assy deformed protruding downward?

3. Reon

EJ Frame Assy, CDR Guide Assy

1. Are the Left/Right EJ Link Levers correctly installed?

1. Ins

The top edge of paper does not reach the PF Roller.

Left/Right Upper Paper Guide*

1. Are the springs of the Left/Right Upper Paper Guides disengaged?

1. InsGu

Table 3-7. Paper Jam Error Troubleshooting

Occurrence Timing Symptom Faulty Part/

Part Name Check Point

Star Wheel Roller Holder

EJ Frame Assy* (backside)

Page 74: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

T 74

Remedy Reference

rrectly attach the compression spring 1 in between the ASF Frame and the pper.

“4.5.16 Rear ASF Assy/Change Lever” ( p. 135 )

tall the RASF planetary gear rrectly.

ean the LD Roller surface with a cloth istened with alcohol. this does not solve the problem, lace the LD Roller with a new one.

tach the torsion spring correctly.

ROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting

Table 3-8. Paper Out Error Troubleshooting

Occurrence Timing Symptom Faulty Part/

Part Name Check Point

Any time

The LD Roller shaft rotates to feed paper, but the Hopper does not move. Rear ASF Assy

1. Does the Hopper operate normally during the paper feed operation?

1. Co2.5Ho

2. Is the RASF planetary gear correctly engaged with the cam of the spur gear 34.4?

3. Insco

The LD Roller shaft rotates normally, but paper is not fed. Rear ASF Assy

1. Is there any paper dust attached on the surface of the LD Roller?

1. Clmo*Ifrep

The ASF Motor drive force is not transmitted to the LD Roller shaft. Rear ASF Assy

1. Is the torsion spring correctly attached? 1. At

ASF Sub Motor

[Right side]Planetary

GearSpur Gear

Cam

ASF Motor

Torsion Spring

Hook

[Right side]

Page 75: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

T 75

tach the extension spring 0.76 rrectly.

“4.5.16 Rear ASF Assy/Change Lever” ( p. 135 )

assemble the Rear ASF correctly.If s does not solve the problem, replace Rear ASF Assy with a new one. (See apter 2 “Flowchart 2-8. ASF motor ve force transmission” ( p. 41 ) for lanations of the gears.)

Remedy Reference

ROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting

Any time The ASF Motor drive force is not transmitted to the LD Roller shaft. Rear ASF Assy

2. Is the extension spring 0.76 of the Change Lever disengaged?

2. Atco

3. Are the gears on the Rear ASF correctly engaged with each other?

3. RethitheChdriexp

Table 3-8. Paper Out Error Troubleshooting

Occurrence Timing Symptom Faulty Part/

Part Name Check Point

[Right rear]

Extension Spring

Change Lever

ASF Motor

LD Roller

ASF Motor

Planetary Gear

ASF Motor

Page 76: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

T 76

Remedy Reference

W

place the CR tray with a new one.

---

nnect the cable correctly. “4.5.9 EJ Frame Assy/CDR Guide Assy” ( p. 124 )

place the CDR Mode Sensor with a w one.

ean the marking area on the CDR tray.

---

ROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting

Table 3-9. CDR Tray Error Troubleshooting

Occurrence Timing Symptom Faulty Part/

Part Name Check Point

hen printing on CDR

The CDR tray is properly set to print on CD/DVD, but the error occurs.

CDR Tray

1. Is the protrusion on the CDR tray that contacts with the CDR Mode Sensor cracked?

1. Re

CDR ModeSensor

1. Is the CDR Mode Sensor cable properly connected to CN13 connector on the Main Board?

1. Co

2. Is the CDR Mode Sensor damaged? 2. Rene

The CDR tray center detection sequence is interrupted and the CDR is ejected.

CDR Tray

1. Is there any paper dust or foreign materials attached on the white marking area on the CDR tray?

1. Cl

Protrusion CDR Tray

Marking

CDR Tray

Page 77: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

T 77

W

ean the surface of the PW Sensor.

“4.5.13 Carriage Assy” ( p. 130 )

nnect the cable correctly.

place the Carriage Assy with a new one.

place the Carriage Assy with a new one.

place the Main Board with a new one. “4.4.1 Main Board Assy” ( p. 106 )

Remedy Reference

W

nnect the cable correctly.

“4.5.9 EJ Frame Assy/CDR Guide Assy” ( p. 124 )

place the CDR Mode Sensor with a w one.

place the CDR Mode Sensor with a w one.

tall the CDR Guide Assy correctly.

place the Main Board with a new one. “4.4.1 Main Board Assy” ( p. 106 )

Remedy Reference

ROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting

hen printing on CDR

The CDR tray center detection sequence is interrupted and the CDR is ejected.

PW Sensor

1. Is the PW Sensor free of paper dust or ink stain? 1. Cl

2. Is the PW Sensor cable properly connected to the CR Encoder Board and the PW Sensor connector?

2. Co

PW Sensor3. Is the PW Sensor cable damaged? 3. Re

4. Is the PW Sensor damaged? 4. Re

Main Board1. Check the circuit components on the Main Board

for damage.1. Re

Table 3-10. CDR Guide Error Troubleshooting

Occurrence Timing Symptom Faulty Part/

Part Name Check Point

hen printing on CDR

The CDR Guide is set properly, but the error occurs.

CDR ModeSensor

1. Is the CDR Mode Sensor cable properly connected to CN13 connector on the Main Board?

1. Co

2. Is the CDR Mode Sensor damaged? 2. Rene

3. Is the CDR Mode Sensor cable broken? 3. Rene

CDR Guide Assy 1. Is the CDR Guide Assy correctly installed? 1. Ins

Main Board1. Check the circuit components on the Main Board

for damage.1. Re

Table 3-9. CDR Tray Error Troubleshooting

Occurrence Timing Symptom Faulty Part/

Part Name Check Point

Cable

PW Sensor

CR Encoder Board

Page 78: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

T 78

3.

3.Th

Remedy

Pap

heet.wn on the ASF, the button on the control panel.eral times.

cloth moistened with alcohol to a post card and clean the roller

so that the alcohol-moistened cloth contacts with the LD Roller e).

d, press the button on the control panel to start paper feeding. several times. The roller surface (LD Roller or Retard Roller)

, replace the LD Roller and the Retard Roller with new ones.

chanism are properly engaged.aterial is found inside the mechanism, remove it.

Remedy

Pabe

nstallation, and check the PF Timing Belt for a proper 28))

ROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting by Symptom (no error indications)

4 Troubleshooting by Symptom (no error indications)

4.1 Troubleshooting Printer Mechanism Problemsis section provides troubleshooting information for printing problems.

Paper feed error

Paper eject error

Table 3-11. Troubleshooting Paper Feed ProblemsProblem Possible Cause Check Point

er is not fed

Contamination or wear of the Front Retard Roller, Pickup Roller, Idle Roller, LD Roller, and Retard Roller.

Are there any micro pearl paper dust or greasy dirt attached on the surface of the Paper Feed Roller?

Clean the roller using a cleaning s1. Load a cleaning sheet upside do2. Start paper feed operation using3. Repeat the above procedure sev

To remove severe smear, staple a using it as described below.1. Load the post card on the ASF

surface (or Retard Roller surfac2. Holding the top edge of the car3. Repeat the paper feed operation

is cleaned.If this does not solve the problem

Abnormal operation of the paper feed mechanism Is there any abnormality found in the paper feed mechanism? Make sure the gears on the me

If any obstructions or foreign m

Table 3-12. Troubleshooting Paper Ejection ProblemsProblem Possible Cause Check Point

per get jammed before ing ejected.

Paper feed operation error Does the PF Roller rotate normally and is the rotational force transmitted to the EJ Roller correctly? Check the PF Motor for proper i

tension.(“ 4.5.11 PF Motor ” (p.1EJ Roller operation failure Does the EJ Roller rotate normally?

Page 79: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

T 79

Remedy

ThCapr

it as specified.(See “ 6.1.3 Lubrication ” (p.175))

the Main Frame.

5.16 Rear ASF Assy/Change Lever ” (p.135))

ROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting by Symptom (no error indications)

Carriage error

Table 3-13. Troubleshooting Carriage ProblemsProblem Possible Cause Check Point

e movement of the rriage Assy during

inting is abnormal.

The Carriage Assy does not move smoothly.

Is there any obstructions on the Carriage path? Remove the obstructions.

Does the Carriage Assy move smoothly when it is manually moved? Clean the CR shaft and lubricate

Does the Head FFC has an adequate slack and not interrupting the Carriage movement? Check the FFC status by manually moving the Carriage Assy to the left and to the right.

Route the Head FFC correctly on

Are the springs that secure the Change Lever and Change Slider disengaged? Attach the springs correctly.(“ 4.

Page 80: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

T 80

Remedy

Ceralwcor

ad surface using a cotton-tipped swab.

ystem with a new one.

FFC with a new one.es not solve the problem, replace the Printhead with a new one.

Domis

ad surface using a cotton-tipped swab.

artridge with a new one.

FFC with a new one.es not solve the problem, replace the Printhead with a new one.

Priabn

the Head FFC.ound in the connection, replace the Printhead with a new one.

Vestra

D adjustment.(See “ 5.2 Adjustment by Using Adjustment ))

Wh

ft surface with a soft dry cloth.e PF Roller surface with a soft brush.oller with a new one.artridge with a new one.rame and apply G-71 grease as specified. ication ” (p.175)) gap setting.(See “ 5.3.1 PG Adjustment ” (p.161))

y part with a new one.

ad surface using a cotton-tipped swab.r Blade or replace it with a new one.head with a new one.R shaft.

haft with a new one.

ROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting by Symptom (no error indications)

Print error

Table 3-14. Troubleshooting Printing ProblemsProblem Possible Cause Check Point

tain dots are ays not printed rectly

Contamination of the Printhead surface (dots are missing) Run a cleaning and make a test print. Repeat it several times. Clean the Printhe

The capping absorber contacts with the Printhead surface. Is the capping absorber deformed or damaged? Replace the Ink S

Head FFC failure Is the Head FFC damaged? Replace the HeadPrinthead failure Run a cleaning and nozzle check. Repeat it several times. If the cleaning do

ts are sometimes sing

Contamination of the Printhead surface (dots are missing) Run a cleaning and nozzle check. Repeat it several times. Clean the Printhe

Ink Cartridge failure Replace the ink cartridges with new ones, and run a nozzle check. The problem does not occur? Replace the Ink C

Poor connection of the Head FFC Check the FFC using a tester. Does the result show abnormality? Replace the HeadPrinthead failure Run a cleaning several times, and then run a nozzle check. If the cleaning do

ntout is totally ormal

Poor connection of the Head FFC Is the FFC securely connected to the boards and Carriage Assy? Securely connectPrinthead failure Is the Head FFC securely connected to the Printhead? If no problem is f

rtical lines are not ight Incorrect Bi-D adjustment Has the Bi-D adjustments been carried out properly? Carry out the Bi-

Program ” (p.157

ite streaking

Contamination of the CR shaft Is the CR shaft free of dirt? Clean the CR sha

PF Roller failureIs the PF Roller free of dirt? Carefully clean thIs the PF Roller damaged? Replace the PF R

Ink Cartridge failure Set new ink cartridges and make a test print. The problem does not occur? Replace the Ink C

Sliding operation failure of the Carriage Is the backside of the Main Frame where the Carriage slides against adequately lubricated?

Clean the Main F(See “ 6.1.3 Lubr

Incorrect platen gap Are the platen gap settings correct? Correct the platen

Damage of gears Are the gears of the PF and ASF mechanisms free of damage or deformation? Replace the fault

Due to contamination on the Printhead surface, ink droplets are fired diagonally.

Run a cleaning and make a test print. Repeat it several times. Clean the PrintheIs the Cleaner Blade free of dust or dirt? Clean the Cleane

Printhead failure Run a cleaning several times, and make a test print. Replace the Print

CR shaft failureIs the CR shaft correctly installed? Reassemble the CIs the CR shaft surface damaged? Replace the CR s

Page 81: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

T 81

3.Ch

3.

Remedy

Po wer code with a new one.

In t power source.Po ble correctly.Fu wer Supply Board.

Aain Board when the output voltage is normal.wer Supply Unit when the output voltage is abnormal.

Remedy

Thcois

a new one.

.

lace it with a new one.

ew one.

e problem, replace the Printhead with a new one.tly. m, replace the ink cartridges or the Printhead with a new ones.

ROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting by Symptom (no error indications)

4.2 Troubleshooting Electrical Problemseck the points described in the table below when the printer does not operate at all (LED does not light) at power-on.

4.3 Troubleshooting Ink Supply ProblemsNormal print cannot be made

Table 3-15. Troubleshooting Electrical ProblemsPossible Cause Check Point

wer code failure Replace the power code with another one, and check whether the printer is normally powered or not. Replace the po

correct AC power supply Does the AC power source match with the requirement of the printer? Use the correcor connection of the connectors Is the Power Supply Unit cable properly connected to CN5 connector on the Main Board? Connect the case failure Is the fuse (F1) on the Power Supply Board blown? Replace the Po

bnormal output of the Power Supply Board Is a normal voltage being output from the Power Supply Board?Replace the MReplace the Po

Table 3-16. Troubleshooting Printing ProblemsProblem Possible Cause Check Point

e carriage moves rrectly, but the printout

abnormal.

Ink Cartridge failure Set new ink cartridges and make a test print. The problem does not occur? Replace the Ink Cartridge with

Incorrect connection of the Head FFC.

Is the Head FFC properly connected to the Head Board and connector CN7 on the Main Board? Correctly connect the Head FFC

Cleaner Blade failure Is the Cleaner Blade free of dust or dirt? Clean the Cleaner Blade or repPoor connection of the Head FFC

Check the FFC using a tester. Does the result show abnormality? Replace the Head FFC with a n

Printhead failure Run a cleaning and make a test print. Repeat it several times. If the cleaning does not solve th

Ink leak or clogging Is ink leakage observed on the Printhead? Install the ink cartridges correcIf this does not solve the proble

Page 82: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

T 82

Remedy

IntraPrfrtu

new one.

ed swab. If it is damaged, replace the Ink System with a new

new one.

rely connect it with the tube of the Waste Ink Pad.

ROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting by Symptom (no error indications)

Waste ink error

Table 3-17. Troubleshooting Ink Suction/Waste Ink ProblemsProblem Possible Cause Check Point

k is not properly nsported from the inthead to the cap, or om the cap to the ink be.

The pump tube is partially flat. Is the tube properly rooted without being pressed? Replace the Ink System with a

Contamination or damage of the cap Is the cap free of foreign materials or damage? Clean the cap with a cotton-tipp

one.

Disconnection of the tube Is the tube disconnected from the bottom of the cap? Securely connect the tube.

Cap movement failure Is the compression spring of the cap section properly engaged? Replace the Ink System with a

Depression of the tube Is the tube depressed in between the Waste Ink Pads and Ink System? Root the tube correctly and secu

Page 83: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

T 83

3.Thcar

Indr

US

Po

M

Ca

Cothe

Unme

M

Po

Fir

cted FFCs or s inside the If no disconnection or displacement is found,

replace the Main Board with a new one.

maged? Replace the Main Board with a new one.

maged? Replace the Card Board with a new one.

shooting Memory Card Problems

oint Remedy

ROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting by Symptom (no error indications)

4.4 Troubleshooting I/F-related Problemsis section provides troubleshooting information on the USB interfaces and memory d slot related problems.

USB I/F error

Memory Card related error

Table 3-18. Troubleshooting USB I/F Problems

Possible Cause Check Point Remedy

correct printer iver installation

Click My Computer → Property → Device Manager on Windows computer. Is the printer driver is included in the Other Devices by mistake?

Uninstall the driver and reinstall it correctly referring to the User’s Guide.

B cable failure Replace the cable with another one.The problem does not occur?

Replace the USB cable with a new one.

or connection Is the USB terminal free of foreign materials? Remove the foreign material, and clean the contact points.

ain Board failure Is the Main Board damaged? Replace the Main Board.

rd Board failure Is the Card Board damaged? Replace the Card Board.

Table 3-19. Troubleshooting Memory Card Problems

Possible Cause Check Point Remedy

rruption of data in memory card

The memory card data may have been corrupted due to static electricity or any other cause.

Check the card whether it can be read by a computer. If the card cannot be read by the computer, format the card.

supported mory card

Is the memory card supported by the printer? Use a memory card supported by the printer.

emory card failureCheck if the printer can read another memory card. Does the printer normally read the card?

Use the another memory card.

or connection

Is there any dust or foreign material inside the memory card slot or on the memory card?

Remove the foreign material, and clean the contact points.

Are the slot pins bent or broken? Replace the Card Board.

mware failure - Upload the firmware.

Electric noiseIs there any disconnedisplaced ferrite coreprinter?

Main Board failure Is the Main Board da

Card Board failure Is the Card Board da

Table 3-19. Trouble

Possible Cause Check P

Page 84: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

T 84

3.ThfirsAcche

itialization

Scerr

Coerr

Scop

Evma

“FIndcleon

Picture is not read clearly.Table 3-26

(p.85)

USB interface error Table 3-18 (p.83)

does not operate for initializationck Point Yes/No Remedy

onnector for n. Is there any connected?

Yes Connect the disconnected connector.

No Replace the main board.

arriage unit does not operateck Point Yes/No Remedy

the connectors 9 and 20) on the rd disconnected?

Yes Connect the connector.

of Trouble and Reference for Remedy

Description of Trouble Reference for Remedy

ROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting for Scanner

5 Troubleshooting for Scanner

is section describes repair/service for the Scanner mechanism. In troubleshooting, t identify the trouble at the Assy level based on the observation. cording to the observation as described in Table 3-21 (p.84) , perform the necessary cking by referring to the appropriate table.

Scanner Errors at User Level

Observation of Trouble and Reference for Remedy

Scanner does not operate for in

Carriage unit does not operate

Table 3-20. Scanner Errors at User Level

Error Cause Remedy

anner or

• Defective CIS unit• Defective scanner motor• The scanner carriage is

interfering with any other part.

• Replace the scanner carriage Assy.• Remove the obstacle.

mmand or

Undefined command is detected.

When correct command is received, error status is cancelled.Turn the power off once and then turn it on again.

anner en Scanner cover is open. Close the cover.

Table 3-21. Observation of Trouble and Reference for Remedy

Observation Description of Trouble Reference for Remedy

en with power turned on, the chine does not operate.

The machine does not operate for initialization.

Table 3-22 (p.84)

atal error” occurred.ication error occurs and it is not ared even after power is turned off ce and then turned on again.

CR unit does not operate. Table 3-23 (p.84)

CR unit operates but error is indicated.Table 3-24

(p.85)

The LED does not light up.Table 3-25

(p.85)

Picture is not read clearly.

“Communication error”.Indication error occurs and when communication with the host is tried again, “Communication error” recurs.

Table 3-22. ScannerCause Che

Connector is disconnected.

Check each cdisconnectioconnector dis

Table 3-23. CCause Che

Connector on the Main Board is disconnected

Is any of (CN18, 1Main Boa

Table 3-21. Observation

Observation

Page 85: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

T 85

Fame

Fa

De

Uprem

De

CoBo

De

De

icture cannot be read clearlyck Point Yes/No Remedy

ent table (glass) t and wiping No Clean the document table.

--- --- Replace the CIS Unit.

--- --- Replace the main board

ROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting for Scanner

Carriage operates but error indicated

LED does not light up

Picture cannot be read clearly

ulty carriage moving chanism

Grease is applied properly?

No Apply grease at designated point

1. Does CR motor operate when power is turned ON with upper case of Scanner removed?

2. Does CR unit move with CR motor removed?

No

Check the carriage moving mechanism, replace the relevant parts or remove and reinstall them.

ulty CR motor

Disconnect the connector (CN18) of the CR Motor from the Main Board, and check continuity between pin 1 and pin 2 on the motor side, using a circuit tester.

No Replace the CR motor.

fective main board --- --- Replace the main board.

Table 3-24. Carriage operates but error indicatedCause Check Point Yes/No Remedy

per case of scanner is oved.

Upper case of scanner is removed.? Yes Install the upper case.

fective main board --- --- Replace the main board

Table 3-25. LED does not light upCause Check Point Yes/No Remedy

nnector on the Main ard is disconnected

Connector CN19 on main board is disconnected? Yes Connect the connector

CN19 on the main board.

fective CIS Unit Does the lamp light up when the CIS Unit is replaced? Yes Replace the CIS Unit.

fective main board --- --- Replace the main board

Table 3-23. Carriage unit does not operateCause Check Point Yes/No Remedy

Table 3-26. PCause Che

Soiled document tableIs the documfree from dirmark?

Defective CIS Unit

Defective main board

Page 86: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

T 86

3.Th bleshoot the problem referring to the descriptions giv

lve the problem, replace the duplex unit with a new one.

Du

Du

Thocis

Thocis froerr

uplex Unit Paper Jam Error

ssible Cause Remedy

m has occurred in the it.per is smaller in size ied by the print setting card size paper is fed size is specified)r fails to detect the it while reversing the printing on its backside.

• Remove the duplex unit and open the cover (if necessary) to remove the paper. Then reinstall the unit. Left the printer power On during the work. (The duplex printing is resumed from the next page)

• Cancel the duplex print job, and remove the duplex unit and open the cover (if necessary) to remove the paper.

failure/poor connection • Check if the PE sensor is correctly connected.If not, connect it correctly.(See Table 3-2 (p.56)/ “ 4.5.15 Paper Guide Rear/PE Sensor ” (p.134).)

• Check if the PE sensor is damaged.If it is, replace the Rear Paper Guide with a new one. (See Table 3-2 (p.56)/ “ 4.5.15 Paper Guide Rear/PE Sensor ” (p.134).)

ROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting Duplex Unit Problems

6 Troubleshooting Duplex Unit Problemsis section provides troubleshooting information on the duplex unit. Find the problem you face in the following tables, and trouen in the “Possible Cause” and “Remedy”.

Problems and reference table

Duplex unit open error

Duplex unit paper jam error

Note : If the above remedies do not so

Table 3-27. Duplex Unit Problems & Reference Table

Error Message Problem Reference

plex unit open error The printer cannot detect the duplex unit when duplex printing is started.

Table 3-28 (p.86)

plex unit paper jam error A paper jam occurs in the duplex unit.Table 3-29

(p.86)

Table 3-28. Duplex Unit Open Error

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

e duplex unit open error curs when duplex printing started.

1. The printer cannot detect the duplex unit due to incorrect installation of the unit.

• Install the duplex unit correctly.

2. Duplex unit sensor failure/poor connection

• Check if the duplex unit sensor is correctly connected.If not, connect it correctly.(See “ 4.5.7 APG Assy/Sub Board/ASF Encoder/Retard ASF Assy ” (p.120))

• Check if the duplex unit sensor is damaged.If it is, replace the sensor with a new one.(See “ 4.5.7 APG Assy/Sub Board/ASF Encoder/Retard ASF Assy ” (p.120))

e duplex unit open error curs when duplex printing started after recovering m a duplex unit paper jam or.

1. The printer cannot detect the duplex unit due to incorrect installation of the unit.

• Install the duplex unit correctly. (The duplex printing is resumed from the next page)

• Cancel the duplex print job.

Table 3-29. D

Symptom Po

The duplex unit paper jam error occurs when duplex printing is started.

1. A paper jaduplex un

2. The fed pathat specif(e.g.; postwhen A4

3. The printeduplex unpaper for

2. PE sensor

Page 87: RX680 Service Manual

C H A P T E R

4DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

Page 88: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Overview 88

4.1 OverviewThis section describes procedures for disassembling the main components of the Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 .

Unless otherwise specified, disassembled units or components can be reassembled by reversing the disassembly procedure.

Procedures which, if not strictly observed, could result in personal injury are described under the heading “WARNING”.

Precautions for any disassembly or assembly procedures are described under the heading “CAUTION”.

Chips for disassembling procedures are described under the heading “CHECK POINT”.

If the assembling procedure is different from the reversed procedure of the disassembling, the procedure is described under the heading “REASSEMBLY”.

Any adjustments required after disassembling the units are described under the heading “ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED”.

When you have to remove any units or parts that are not described in this chapter, refer to the exploded diagrams in the appendix.

Read precautions described in the next section before starting.

4.1.1 PrecautionsSee the precautions given under the heading “WARNING” and “CAUTION” in the following column when disassembling Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 .

WARNING Disconnect the power cable before disassembling or assembling the printer.If you need to work on the printer with power applied, strictly follow the instructions in this manual.Wear protective goggles to protect your eyes from ink. If ink gets in your eye, flush the eye with fresh water and see a doctor immediately.Always wear gloves for disassembly and reassembly to avoid injury from sharp metal edges.Use static discharge equipment such as anti-static wrist straps when accessing internal components to protect sensitive electronic components and circuitry.Never touch the ink or wasted ink with bare hands. If ink comes into contact with your skin, wash it off with soap and water immediately. If irritation occurs, contact a physician.Make sure the tip of the waste ink tube is located at correct position when reassembling the waste ink tube, or it will cause ink leakage.

CAUTION When transporting, do not remove the ink cartridges. Pack the printer with the cartridges installed. Use only recommended tools for disassembly, assembly or adjustment of the printer. (Table 4-1 "List of Tools" (p.89))Be sure to tighten the screws to the specified torque.Apply lubricants and adhesives as specified. (See Chapter 6 "Specified Lubricant" (p.175) for details.)Make the specified adjustments when you disassemble the printer. (Chapter 5 contains additional information on adjustments.)When using compressed air products, such as air duster, for cleaning during repair and maintenance, the use of such products containing flammable gas is prohibited.Be careful not to scratch or damage the coating on exterior surface of the product during disassembly and reassembly.

Page 89: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Overview 89

4.1.2 ToolsUse only specified tools to avoid damaging the printer.

Note : All of the tools listed above are commercially available. EPSON provides the tools listed with EPSON tool code.

4.1.3 ScrewsThe screws used in the printer are as shown in the table below. Make sure you always use the correct type and number of screws. The numbers shown in the “No.” column appear throughout this chapter to indicate the screw type more clearly.

Table 4-1. List of Tools

Tool Part No.

Phillips Screwdriver (No.1) 1080530

Phillips Screwdriver (No.2) -

Flathead Screwdriver -

Precision Screwdriver #1 (flathead) -

Tweezers -

Long-nose pliers -

Acetate tape -

Table 4-2. Screw Types

Abbreviation Full NameC.B.S Phillips Bind S-TiteC.B.P Phillips Bind P-TiteC.P. Phillips Pan headC.B. Phillips Bind

C.B.P.(P4) Phillips Bind P-Tite Sems R2C.B.S.(P4) Phillips Bind S-Tite Sems R2

Table 4-3. List of Screw Types

No. Description Image

1 C.B.S. 2.5x6

2 C.B.S. 3x6

3 C.B.S. 3x8

4 C.B.S. 3x10

5 C.B. 3x10

7 C.B.P. 2x8

8 C.B.P. 2.6x8

9 C.B.P. 3x8

10 C.B.P. 2.5x10

11 C.B.P. 3x10

Page 90: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Overview 90

4.1.4 Work Completion ChecklistWhenever the printer is serviced, use the checklist shown below to confirm all work is completed properly and the printer is ready to be returned to the user.

Make sure to always check the maintenance counter before disassembling the printer. If the counter shows that some part or component has almost reached the end of its service life, replace the part after receiving prior approval from the user.

12 C.C. 3x4

13 C.P. 3x6

14 C.B.P.(P4) 3x8

15 C.B.S.(P4) 3x8

16 C.B.S.(P4) 3x6

Table 4-3. List of Screw Types

No. Description Image

Table 4-4. Work Completion Checklist

Classification Item Check Point Status

PrinterUnit

Self-test Is the operation normal? OK/ NGOn-line Test Is the printing attempt successful? OK/ NGPrinthead (print a nozzle check pattern)

Is ink discharged normally from all the nozzles? OK/ NG

CarriageMechanism

Does the carriage move smoothly? OK/ NGIs there any abnormal noise during its operation? OK/ NG

Paper Feeding Mechanism

Is paper advanced smoothly? OK/ NGNo paper jamming? OK/ NGNo paper skew? OK/ NGNo multiple-sheet feeding? OK/ NGNo abnormal noise? OK/ NGIs the paper path free of obstructions? OK/ NG

On-line Test On-line Test Is the operation normal? OK/ NG

Adjustment Specified Adjustments

Are all the adjustments correctly completed? OK/ NG

Lubrication Specified Lubrication

Has lubrication been applied at the specified points? OK/ NG

Is the amount of lubrication correct? OK/ NG

Function FirmwareVersion Version: OK/ NG

Page 91: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Overview 91

4.1.5 Required Preparation before DisassemblyMake sure to carry out the following operations before disassembling the printer.

When the Main Board needs to be replaced, make a backup copy of EEPROM data.Unlock the carriage lock and move the CR Unit to other than its home position.

• How to Unlock the Carriage (p.91)

4.1.6 Orientation DefinitionOrientation descriptions used in the disassembly/reassembly procedures are as follows.

Table 4-5. Orientation Definition

4.1.7 How to Unlock the CarriageUnlocking the carriage and moving the Carriage Assy to other than its home position is required for disassembly of some parts or components. Carry out any of the following operations to unlock the carriage.

Power the printer and turn it off forcedly by disconnecting the power cable when the CR Assy is unlocked and moved away from the home position.

Turn the EJ Roller gear on the left side of the printer in the direction of the arrow until the carriage is unlocked. (Removing the Housing Middle is required.)

Table 4-6. How to Unlock the Carriage

Packing

InkCartridge

Are the ink cartridges installed correctly? OK/ NG

Waste Ink Pads Is the remaining capacity of the waste ink pads enough? OK/ NG

Carriage positionIs the carriage located at the position where the Printhead is covered with the cap?

OK/ NG

Others Attachments, Accessories

Have all the relevant items been included in/returned to the package? OK/ NG

Table 4-4. Work Completion Checklist

Classification Item Check Point Status

Rear side

Left side Right (home) side

Front side

CAUTION Be extremely careful not to damage the EJ Roller gear. Extra care must be taken to avoid injury from sharp metal edges

Left Side

EJ Roller Gear

PF Roller Gear

UnlockedLocked

Carriage Lock Carriage Lock

Page 92: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Overview 92

4.1.8 Disassembly FlowchartThe flowchart below shows step-by-step disassembly procedures. When disassembling each unit, refer to the page number shown in the figure.

Flowchart 4-1. Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Disassembly Flowchart (1)

START

Paper Support Assy (p.94)

Panel Unit/Upper Housing (p.96)

Scanner Unit (p.100)

Main Board Assy (p.106)

Hinge Assy (p.102)

Rear Cover/Automatic Duplex Unit (p.94)

Middle Housing (p.110)

Power Supply Unit (p.113)

Printer Mechanism(following page)

Stacker Assy (p.114) CR Scale (p.117) Printhead (p.118)

CR Motor Unit (p.105)

Disassembling the Panel Unit (p.108)Panel Unit/Upper Housing (p.96)

Disassembling the Scanner Unit (p.103)

Document Cover/ASF Cover (p.103)

Scanner Housing (p.103)

CIS Unit (p.104)

Hinge Assy (p.102)Disassembling the Main Board Assy (p.107)

Front ASF Cover Assy (p.96)

Rear Cover/Automatic Duplex Unit (p.94)

Cassette Assy (p.95)

Page 93: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Overview 93

Flowchart 4-2. Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Disassembly Flowchart (2)

CHECKPOINT

The parts/components indicated with have further procedures. You need to remove the parts/units shown in dashed line box if they exist on the way to the target part/unit.The color and shape of the printer illustrated in this manual may differ from the final product.

Printer Mechanism (p.114)

APG Assy/Sub Board/ASF Encoder/Retard ASF Assy (p.120)

CR Motor (p.129)

Carriage Assy (p.130)

Rear ASF Assy/Change Lever (p.135)

Paper Guide Upper L/R (p.133)

Paper Guide Rear/PE Sensor (p.134)

Ink System (p.142)

Rear Frame Assy (p.144)

PF Motor (p.128)

EJ Frame Assy/CDR Guide Assy (p.124)

Paper Guide Front & EJ Roller Assy/PF Roller Assy (p.145)

Paper Guide Lower Assy (p.150)

Paper Guide Bank Assy (p.149)

Ink System (p.142)

Rear ASF Assy/Change Lever (p.135)

ASF Motor Assy (p.143) ASF Sub Motor/RH Sensor/RP Sensor (p.137)

LD roller/Retard Roller (p.139)

PF Motor (p.128)

EJ Frame Assy/CDR Guide Assy (p.124)

PF Encoder (p.127)Waste Ink Pads/Foot (p.123)

Page 94: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removing Exterior Parts/Components 94

4.2 Removing Exterior Parts/Components

4.2.1 Paper Support AssyParts/Components need to be removed in advance: Nothing

Removal procedure

1. Open the Paper Support Assy.2. Release the left Bushing from the shaft of the Rear ASF Assy by pushing the

part indicated with , then release the right bearing and remove the Paper Support Assy.

Figure 4-1. Removing the Paper Support Assy

4.2.2 Rear Cover/Automatic Duplex UnitParts/Components need to be removed in advance: Nothing

Removal procedure

Removing the Rear Cover

1. Unlock the Rear Cover by simultaneously pressing the tabs on both sides inward, and remove the Rear Cover.

Figure 4-2. Removing the Rear Cover

Removing the Automatic Duplex Unit

1. Unlock the Automatic Duplex Unit by pressing the buttons on both sides, and remove the Automatic Duplex Unit.

Figure 4-3. Removing the Automatic Duplex Unit

Bushing Bushing

Paper Support Assy Rear ASF Assy

Tab

Press

Tab

Rear Cover

Press

Button Button

Automatic Duplex Unit

PressPress

Page 95: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removing Exterior Parts/Components 95

4.2.3 Cassette AssyParts/Components need to be removed in advance: Nothing

Removal procedure

1. Hold the handle and pull it towards you, and remove the Cassette Assy.

Figure 4-4. Removing the Cassette Assy

2. Remove the Cassette Cover.3. Insert a flathead screwdriver into the grooves and release the hooks that

secure the Front Cassette Cover.4. Release the four tabs while sliding the Front Cassette Cover upward, and

remove the Cassette Cover Front.

Figure 4-5. Disassembling the Cassette Assy

5. Release the hook (1) from the bottom of the Cassette Assy and remove the Left Edge Guide.

6. Release the hook (2) from the bottom of the Cassette Assy and remove the Front Edge Guide.

7. Remove the two Cassette Corks.

Figure 4-6. Disassembling the Cassette Assy

Handle

Cassette Assy

Cassette AssyCassette Assy

Front Cassette Cover

Cassette Cover

REASSEMBLY Install the Cassette Corks onto the frames, aligning its corners with the reference positions.

Figure 4-7. Installing the Cassette Corks

Cassette Assy

2

1Cassette Assy

: HookFront Edge Guide

Left Edge Guide

Cassette Cork

Cassette Cork

: Reference position : Frame

Page 96: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removing Exterior Parts/Components 96

4.2.4 Front ASF Cover AssyParts/Components need to be removed in advance

Rear Cover/Automatic Duplex Unit

Removal procedure

1. Release the lock by pinching the levers and open the Front ASF Cover Assy.

Figure 4-8. Removing the Front ASF Cover Assy (1)

2. Release the guide pins of the Front ASF Cover Assy (two each on both sides) from the grooves and holes of the frames in the order given in the figure, and remove the Front ASF Cover Assy.

Figure 4-9. Removing the Front ASF Cover Assy (2)

4.2.5 Panel Unit/Upper HousingParts/Components need to be removed in advance: Nothing

Removal procedure

1. Open the Scanner Unit.

Figure 4-11. Removing the Upper Housing and Panel Unit (1)

Lever

Front ASF Cover Assy

12

Front ASF Cover Assy

Guide pins (x2) Guide pins (x2)

CAUTION When removing the Panel Unit, make sure not to scratch the paintwork.Since the LED Lens (A) on the Decoration Panel L easily comes off, make sure not to lose it when at work.

Figure 4-10. Cautions of removing the Panel Unit

Backside

Decoration Panel L

LED Lens (A) LED Lens (B)

Decoration Panel R

Scanner Unit

Panel Unit

Decoration Panel L Decoration Panel R

Page 97: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removing Exterior Parts/Components 97

2. Release the four hooks and two tabs by inserting a plastic tweezer or the like into the part marked with (between the Panel Unit and the Decoration Panel L), and remove the Decoration Panel L lifting the panel upward.

3. Remove the Decoration Panel R in the same manner.

Figure 4-12. Removing the Decoration Panel L/R

4. Release the two hooks on the back of the Cable Cover by pulling up the two V-marked parts, and remove the Cable Cover while releasing the tabs on both sides.

Figure 4-13. Removing the Cable Cover

5. Remove the five screws, and release the Panel Unit and the Upper Housing.• Screw : (x4) C.B.P. M3x10 (tightening torque: 5-7 kgfcm)• Screw : (x1) C.B.S. M3x8 (tightening torque: 7-9 kgfcm)

(The numbers shown in the figure indicate the order of tightening the screws.)

Figure 4-14. Removing the Upper Housing and Panel Unit (2)

Decoration Panel L Panel Unit

Decoration Panel R

Front Left

V-mark

Cable Cover

CAUTION Do not remove the Panel Unit and Upper Housing too fast since the LCD FFC, the Panel FFC and the Cover Open Sensor cable are connected to them.

1

2 3

54Panel Unit Upper Housing

Page 98: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removing Exterior Parts/Components 98

6. Peel off the Panel FFC and the LCD FFC from the top of the Main Board Assy., and disconnect them from connectors CN4 and CN3.

7. Remove the LCD FFC from the ferrite core.8. Disconnect the Cover Open Sensor cable from connector CN14 of the Main

Board, and remove the Panel Unit and the Upper Housing.

Figure 4-15. Removing the Upper Housing and Panel Unit (3)

9. Separate the Panel Unit and the Upper Housing as follows:

(1) Remove the two screws.•Screw : C.B.P. M3x10 (tightening torque: 5-7 kgfcm)(The numbers shown in the figure indicate the order of tightening the screws.)

(2) Release the two hooks on both sides by pulling the Panel Unit toward you.

(3) Release the two hooks by sliding the Panel Unit upward along the slope.

Figure 4-16. Separating the Panel Unit and Upper Housing

CAUTION Do not disconnect the LCD FFC from the LCD Assy side. If it is disconnected from the LCD Assy, the disassembly of the assy is required, but the quality after the reassembly work cannot be guaranteed. In this case, make sure to replace the LCD Assy.

CN3

CN4

CN14

LCD FFC Panel FFC

Cover Open Sensor Cable

Ferrite Core

Panel Unit

Upper Housing

1 2

Page 99: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removing Exterior Parts/Components 99

10. Release the hook (1) on the bottom of the Upper Housing.11. Release the hook (2) by rotating it by 90 degrees, and remove the Cover Open

Sensor while pulling off the connector cable through the hole of the housing.

Figure 4-17. Removing the Cover Open Sensor (1)

12. Remove the connector cable from the Cover Open Sensor.

Figure 4-18. Removing the Cover Open Sensor (2)

Hook (1)

Hook (2)

Cover Open Sensor (Bottom)

Connector Cable

Upper Housing (Bottom)

90 degrees

Upper Housing (Top)

Connector Cable Cover Open Sensor

REASSEMBLY When installing the Cable Cover, check that the connector cables are correctly routed before installing it, and make sure any cables are caught in between.

• Routing the Cables of the Scanner Unit (1) (p.101)Install the Cable Cover as follows.1. Attach the tab on the rear.2. Attach the tabs on the front by bending the Cable Cover slightly.3. Match the two hooks with their positioning holes, and secure the

Cable Cover by pressing the top of the cover.

Figure 4-19. Installing the Cable Cover

Tighten the screws in the order given in Figure 4-14.

1

2

(3) Press to secure

Hook

Cable Cover

Page 100: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removing Exterior Parts/Components 100

4.2.6 Scanner UnitParts/Components need to be removed in advance

Paper Support Assy/Panel Unit/Upper Housing

Removal procedure

1. Remove the screw and remove the GND Cable.• Screw : C.B.S. M3x8 (tightening torque: 7-9 kgfcm)

2. Disconnect the connector cables from connectors CN18, CN20 on the Main Board, and release the cables from the two grooves A/B on the Middle Housing.

3. Release the four hooks, and remove the FFC Holder.4. Disconnect the FFC from connector CN19.5. Peel off the double-sided tape, and release the FFC together with the FFC

Holder and the two ferrite cores from the groove A on the Middle Housing.

Figure 4-20. Removing the Cables

6. Remove the two screws and remove the Scanner Unit by pulling it out along the ribs of the Hinge Assys as shown in Figure 4-22.• Screw : C.B.P. M3x10 (tightening torque: 5-7 kgfcm)

(The numbers shown in the figure indicate the order of tightening the screws.)

Figure 4-21. Removing the Scanner Unit

CN18

CN19

GND Cable

CN20

FFC Holder

Hook Double-sided tape

Ferrite Core

Groove A

Groove B

Main Board

REASSEMBLY When installing the Scanner Unit, match the positioning holes with their positioning ribs on each Hinge Assy.

Figure 4-22. Installing the Scanner Unit

Tighten the screws in the order given in Figure 4-21.

Scanner Unit

1 2

Rib

Hole

Hinge Assy’s left side

Scanner Unit

Page 101: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removing Exterior Parts/Components 101

REASSEMBLY Route the connector cables as follows.1. Route the FFC through the groove A.2. Route the CR Encorder cable through the groove A.3. Route the CR Motor cable through the groove B.4. Route the GND cable through the groove B.

Figure 4-23. Routing the Cables of the Scanner Unit (1)

CR Encoder cable

CR Motor Cable

GND Cable

Groove A

Groove B

Route CR Encoder cable.

Route FFC inside the rib.

Route FFC into slit.

Route CR Encoder cable to hold down FFC.

FFC

REASSEMBLY 5. Secure the FFC with the two hooks.6. Secure the CR Motor cable with the four hooks.7. Secure the ferrite core of the CR Motor cable with acetate tape

to the place as shown in the figure below.

Figure 4-24. Routing the Cables of the Scanner Unit (2)

: Acetate tape : Hook

Ferrite core and acetate tape

Main Board

CR Motor Cable

FFC

Page 102: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removing Exterior Parts/Components 102

4.2.7 Hinge AssyParts/Components need to be removed in advance

Paper Support Assy/Panel Unit/Upper Housing/Scanner Unit

Removal procedure

1. Remove the tow screws on both sides and remove the Hinge Assy Left/Right.• Screw : C.B.P. M3x10 (tightening torque: 5-7Kgfcm)

Figure 4-25. Removing the Hinge Assy

Hinge Assy L (long) Hinge Assy R (short)

Page 103: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Scanner Unit 103

4.3 Disassembling the Scanner UnitDisassembling procedure of Scanner Unit

4.3.1 Document Cover/ASF CoverDocument Cover

1. Remove the Document Cover upward.

Figure 4-26. Removing the Document Cover

ASF Cover1. Release the tabs on both sides through the holes of the Scanner Unit, and

remove the ASF Cover.

Figure 4-27. Removing the ASF Cover

4.3.2 Scanner Housing

1. Remove the six screws from the bottom of the Scanner Unit.• Screw : C.B.P. M3x10 (tightening torque: 5-7 kgfcm)(TBD)(The numbers shown in the figure indicate the order of tightening the screws.)

2. Remove the Scanner Housing from the rear side (the side with the hinges) of the Scanner Unit.

Figure 4-28. Removing the Scanner Housing

CHECKPOINT

See the section given below for the definition of the directions indicated in the following procedures.

• 4.1.6 Orientation Definition

Document Cover

ASF Cover

CAUTION Following work should be performed in a room where there is a little dust. A clean room or a clean bench would be preferable.Make sure not to damage the document glass, or to contaminate the inside of it since the cleaning work of the inside is considerably difficult.

REASSEMBLY When installing the Scanner Housing, match the five hooks in the front, and secure the hinges side firmly as shown in Figure 4-28.Tighten the screws in the order given in Figure 4-28. (T.B.D.)

Scanner Housing

1

3

5 4

2

6

Page 104: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Scanner Unit 104

4.3.3 CIS Unit

1. Disconnect the FFC from the connector on the CIS Unit.2. Rotate the CIS Unit by 90 degrees upward and remove it from the bearing

holes on both sides of the carriage.

Figure 4-29. Removing the CIS Unit

CAUTION Take extra care not to contaminate the Scanner Timing Belt with grease on the CR Guide of the Lower Housing. Do not touch other parts/components with greasy hands.

REASSEMBLY When installing the CIS Spring, first match the end of the spring with its positioning cutout on the CIS Carriage, and secure the spring by turning it.

Figure 4-30. Installing the CIS Unit (1)

Rotate 90 degrees to remove

FFC

CIS Unit

CIS Carriage

Connector

CIS spring

REASSEMBLY When replacing the CIS Unit, be sure to replace the spacers on both ends. Check the label on the Bottom Board and select the corresponding Spacers as shown in Figure 4-31.

Figure 4-31. Attaching the Spacers

Install the Timing Belt on the carriage orientating the toothed surface of the belt as shown below.

Figure 4-32. Installing the CIS Unit (2)

Label (x2)

Attach the spacers of the same label as the CIS label (A-C).

Label A: CIS,A17 Spacer (Black)Label B: CIS,B19 Spacer (White)Label C: CIS,C21 Spacer (Gray)

Spacer, CIS, B

CIS’s bottom

CIS’s bottom

Timing Belt

No tooth (outside)

Toothed (inside)

Page 105: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Scanner Unit 105

4.3.4 CR Motor Unit

1. Remove the screw that secures the grounding wire.• Screw : C.B. (P2) M3x6 (tightening torque: 5-7Kgfcm)

2. Release the CR Encorder cable, the CR Motor cable, and the grounding wire from the Lower Housing.

Figure 4-33. Removing the CR Motor Unit (1)

3. Remove the screws and washers (x4) securing the CR Motor Unit.• Screw : C.B.P. M3x8 (tightening torque: 5-7Kgfcm)

Figure 4-34. Removing the CR Motor Unit (2)

CAUTION Take care in handling the Lower Housing, remembering that grease is applied to the CR guide area of the Housing Lower. Do not touch any parts with a greasy hand or part. (Especially take great care in handling the Encoder Scale.)Do not remove or loosen the screw of the CR Motor Unit marked with X in Figure 4-34, or the encorder may be misaligned, which ends up in replacing the Scanner Unit.

CR Motor cable

CR Encoder cable

Grounding wire

Secure the cable by winding it once on the hook.

REASSEMBLY When installing the CR Motor Unit on the Lower Housing, push it in the unit until the insulators are compressed to such thickness as shown below.

Route the CR Encorder cable, CR Motor cable, the grounding wire through the eight hooks as shown in Figure 4-33 and Figure 4-34.

No grease!

CR Motor Unit

No loosening/removal

A

B

A<BThe thickness A must be thinner than B.

Page 106: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removing Control Boards 106

4.4 Removing Control Boards4.4.1 Main Board Assy

Parts/Components need to be removed in advancePaper Support Assy/Panel Unit/Upper Housing/Scanner Unit

Removal procedure

1. Disconnect all the connector cables from connectors except CN2 on the Main Board Assy.

Figure 4-35. Connector Layout of Main Board

2. Remove the two screws and remove the GND cable.3. Remove the four screws and remove the Main Board Assy.

• Screw : (x2) C.B.P. M3x8 (tightening torque: 5-7 kgfcm)• Screw : (x2) C.B.S. M3x6 (tightening torque: 7-9 kgfcm)

(The numbers shown in the figure indicate the order of tightening the screws.)

Figure 4-36. Removing the Main Board AssyTable 4-7. Connectors and DestinationCN No. Color Destination Remark

CN1 Silver USB I/F 4pin CN2 FFC Card Board 15pinCN3 FFC LCD Assy 11pinCN4 FFC Panel Board 8pinCN5 White Power Supply Unit 5pinCN6 FFC Printhead 13pinCN7 FFC Printhead 13pinCN8 FFC Printhead 9pinCN9 FFC CSIC Assy 13pin

CN10 FFC CR Encoder/PW Sensor 6pinCN11 FFC Sub Board(CN2: Sensor Relay) 14pinCN12 FFC PF Encoder 4pinCN13 Black CDR Mode Sensor 2pin

CN12

CN20

CN14

CN5

CN8

CN6

CN7

CN9

CN10

CN19CN16

CN11

CN13

CN18

CN17

CN2 CN4 CN3

CN14 White Cover Open Sensor 2pinCN16 White Sub Board (CN1: Motor Relay) 6pinCN17 White PF Motor 2pinCN18 Yellow CR Motor (Scanner) 4pinCN19 FFC CIS Unit 12pinCN20 White CR Encoder (Scanner) 4pin

REASSEMBLY Tighten the screws in the order given in Figure 4-36.

Table 4-7. Connectors and DestinationCN No. Color Destination Remark

1 2

3 4

GND Cable

Page 107: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removing Control Boards 107

4.4.2 Disassembling the Main Board AssyDisassembling procedure

1. Remove the four screws and remove the Upper Shield MB.• Screw : (x4) C.B.S. M3x8 (tightening torque: 7-9 kgfcm)(The numbers shown in the figure indicate the order of tightening the screws.)

Figure 4-37. Removing the Upper Shield MB

2. Peel off the double-sided tape on the FFC and disconnect the FFC from the connector.

Figure 4-38. Removing the Main Board (1)

3. Remove the four screws and remove the Main Board.• Screw(1)(3) : (x2) C.B.S. M3x8 (tightening torque: 7-9 kgfcm)• Screw(2) : (x1) C.B.S. M3x10 (tightening torque: 7-9 kgfcm)• Screw(4) : (x1) C.P. M3x6 (tightening torque: 7-9 kgfcm)(The numbers shown in the figure indicate the order of tightening the screws.)

4. Remove the FFC from connector CN2.

Figure 4-39. Removing the Main Board (2)

5. Remove the four screws and remove the Shield CB.• Screw : (x3) C.B.S. M3x8 (tightening torque: 7-9 kgfcm)• Screw : (x1) C.B.S. M2.5x6 (tightening torque: 7-9 kgfcm)(The numbers shown in the figure indicate the order of tightening the screws.)

Figure 4-40. Removing the Shield CB

3

4Upper Shield MB

1

Main Board

2

Marking

Main Board

Connector

Double-sidedTape

Shield CBBottom

Lower Shield MB

12

3

FFC

CN2

Main Board

4

12

3

4

Shield CB

Bottom

Page 108: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removing Control Boards 108

6. Remove the three screws and remove the Card Board.• Screw : C.B.S. M3x8 (tightening torque: 7-9 kgfcm)(The numbers shown in the figure indicate the order of tightening the screws.)

Figure 4-41. Removing the Card Board

4.4.3 Disassembling the Panel UnitDisassembling procedure

1. Remove the six screws and remove the GND plate PNL.• Screw : C.B.P. M3x8 (tightening torque: 5-7 Kgfcm)(The numbers shown in the figure indicate the order of tightening the screws.)

2. Remove the Shield PNL in the direction of the arrow taking care not to damage the cable connecting the Panel Board on both sides.

Figure 4-42. Removing the Shield PNL/GND Plate PNL

3. Remove the FFC from connector CN1 on the Panel Board.4. Release the six hooks and four positioning pins, and remove the Panel Board.

• Positioning pin: /Hook:

Figure 4-43. Removing the Panel Board

REASSEMBLY When routing the FFC (CN2), route it along the marking on the Shield MB as shown in Figure 4-38.Tighten the screws in the order given in the following figures.

• Card Board: see Figure 4-41.• Shield CB: see Figure 4-40.• Main Board: see Figure 4-39.• Upper Shield MB: see Figure 4-37.

3

12

Card Board

CAUTION When removing the Panel Unit, make sure not to scratch the paintwork.

GND Plate PNL

Remove to

Shield PNLBottom

2

3 5

146

Bottom

Panel BoardCN1Panel FFC

LCD FFCREASSEMBLYOpening

Page 109: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removing Control Boards 109

5. Remove the two screws and remove the LCD Assy.• Screw : C.B.P. M2x8 (tightening torque: 3-5 Kgfcm)

Figure 4-44. Removing the LCD Panel

6. Remove the six Switch Buttons (1) to (6).

Figure 4-45. Removing the SW Buttons

7. Remove the two LED Lenses A and B from the Decoration Panel L.

Figure 4-46. Removing the LED Lens

LCD Assy

TabDowel

Bottom

1 3 4 6

52

Bottom

Decoration Panel L Decoration Panel R

LED Lens (1) LED Lens (2)

REASSEMBLY Make sure to install the Shield PNL under the cable connecting the Panel Board, and tighten the screws in the order given in Figure 4-42.Make sure to secure the Switch Buttons firmly by matching the dowels with their positioning holes. After installing the Shield PNL, press all the buttons to check if they correctly click.When installing the LCD Assy, make sure to match the two dowels of the LCD Bush with their positioning holes on the Panel Unit as shown in Figure 4-44.When installing the LCD Assy, make sure to route the FFC through the opening of the Panel Unit as shown in Figure 4-43.When installing the LCD Coil Spring, attach the spring between the protrusions on top of the LCD Bush as shown in Figure 4-47.

Figure 4-47. Installing LCD Assy

LCD Coil Spring

LCD Bush

Protrusion

Protrusion

Page 110: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 110

4.5 Disassembling the Major Parts/Components

4.5.1 Middle HousingParts/Components need to be removed in advance

Paper Support Assy/Rear Cover/Automatic Duplex Unit/Panel Unit/Upper Housing/Scanner Unit/Main Board Assy/Hinge Assy

Removal procedure

Removing the Middle Housing

1. Peel off the three acetate tapes, and release the PF Motor cable.2. Peel off the acetate tape and release the Motor Relay cable together with the

ferrite core.3. Peel off the three double-sided tapes and release the Sensor Relay FFC

together with the ferrite core.4. Peel off the acetate tape and release the CDR Mode Sensor cable.5. Peel off the PF Encorder FFC.

Figure 4-48. Removing the Middle Housing (1)

6. Remove the six screws.• Screw : (x3) C.B.P. M3x10 (tightening torque: 5-7 kgf.cm)• Screw : (x3) C.B.S. M3x8 (tightening torque: 7-9 kgfcm)

(The numbers shown in the figure indicate the order of tightening the screws.)

Figure 4-49. Removing the Middle Housing (2)

: Hook : Double-sided

tape : Rib : Acetate tape

PF Motor cable CDR Mode Sensor cable

Sensor Relay FFC

PF Encoder FFC

Motor Relay cable

2

1

43

Rear side

65

Page 111: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 111

7. Remove the Middle Housing pulling out the connector cables from the openings (1), (2), (3).

Figure 4-50. Removing the Middle Housing (3)

Removing the Side Cover L/Side Cover R/Slot Cover

Figure 4-51. Removing the Slot Cover/Side Cover L/R

1. Release the hooks (two each) and remove the Side Cover L/R.

Figure 4-52. Removing the Side Cover L/R

2. Release the leg A of the torsion spring from the hook, and remove the torsion spring from the tab.

3. Release the two tabs inside the Slot Cover by opening the cover at the two parts outwardly from the bottom side, and remove the Slot Cover by drawing along the slit (1) and (2).

Figure 4-53. Removing the Slot Cover

CAUTION When removing the Middle Housing, take extra care not to damage the connector cables with the openings.

Head FFC

Middle Housing

Opening (1)

Opening (2)

Opening (3)

Middle Housing

Side Cover RSide Cover L

Slot Cover REASSEMBLY When installing the torsion spring, first attach the leg B to the slit for it as shown in Figure 4-53.

Figure 4-54. Attaching torsion spring (Slot Cover)

Hook

Top Middle Housing

Side Cover L Side Cover R

Middle Housing

1 2Draw outHook

B

A

Torsion Spring

BottomSlot CoverTab

Top

B

ATorsion spring

Slit for spring

Page 112: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 112

Removing the Scanner Cable Guide1. Release the two hooks of the Scanner Cable Guide from behind (at the bottom

of) the Middle Housing, and remove the Scanner Cable Guide from the housing.

Figure 4-55. Removing the Scanner Cable Guide

REASSEMBLY Before installing the Middle Housing, lead the following connector cables through the openings (1), (2), (3) as shown in Figure 4-50.

• Opening (1): five Head FFCs• Opening (2): Motor Relay cable, Sensor Relay FFC, CDR Mode

Sensor cable• Opening (3): PF Encoder FFC, PF Motor cable, Power Supply

cableWhen routing the Head FFCs through the opening (1), make sure the FFCs are not twisted.When installing the Middle Housing, make sure the connector cables are not caught under the housings.When installing the Middle Housing, make sure to set the end of the lumiler attached on the Main Frame inside the Middle Housing as shown in Figure 4-128.Tighten the screws in the order given in Figure 4-49.

BottomScanner Cable Guide

Hooks

REASSEMBLY Route the connector cables after installing the Middle Housing as follows:

• Route the PF motor cable through the groove and secure it with the acetate tape A, B, and C.

• Secure the PF Encoder FFC with two double-sided tapes on the Middle Housing.

Figure 4-56. Routing the cables on Middle Housing (1)

• Route the CDR Mode Sensor cable through the five hooks and one rib, and secure it with the acetate tape E.

• Secure the ferrite core of the Motor Relay cable at the place shown in Figure 4-57, and secure the cable with the rib.

• Secure the ferrite core of the Sensor Relay FFC at the place shown in Figure 4-57, and secure the cable with two double-sided tape.

• Secure the Motor Relay cable and Sensor Relay FFC with the acetate tape D.

Figure 4-57. Routing the cables on Middle Housing (2)

PF Motor cablePF Encoder FFC

:Double-sided tape /:Groove

A B

C

CDR ModeSensor cable

Sensor Relay FFC

Motor Relay cable

: Hook : Double-sided tape : Rib : Ferrite core

E

DRib

Page 113: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 113

4.5.2 Power Supply UnitParts/Components need to be removed in advance

Paper Support Assy/Rear Cover/Automatic Duplex Unit/Panel Unit/Upper Housing/Scanner Unit/Main Board Assy/Hinge Assy/Middle Housing

Removal procedure

1. Peel off the acetate tape and release the PS cable from the four hooks.

Figure 4-58. Releasing the PS cable (Power Supply Unit)

2. Remove the three screws and remove the Power Supply Unit.• Screw : (x2) C.B.P. M3x8 (tightening torque: 5-7 kgfcm)• Screw : (x1) C.B.S. M3x6 (tightening torque: 7-9 kgfcm)

(The numbers shown in the figure indicate the order of tightening the screws.)

Figure 4-59. Removing the Power Supply Unit

3. Remove the PS cable from the connector on the Power Supply Unit.

Figure 4-60. Removing the PS cable

Left

: Hook: Double-sided tape: Acetate tape

PS cable PF Encoder FFC

Power Supply Unit

2Top

1

3

REASSEMBLY Tighten the screws in the order given in Figure 4-59.When installing the Power Supply Unit, secure the PS cable as follows:(1) Attach two double-sided tapes on the PF Encoder FFC to secure it

to the Lower Housing. (See Figure 4-58)(2) Secure the PS cable to the hook on the Power Supply Unit. (See

Figure 4-60)(3) Tighten the screws. (See Figure 4-59)(4) Route the PS cable through the four hooks, and secure it with

acetate tape. (See Figure 4-58)

ADJUSTMENTREQUIRED

When replacing the Power Supply Unit, carry out the adjustment referring to the following.

• Chapter 5 “ ADJUSTMENT” (p.151)

Power Supply Unit

Connector

HookPS cable

Page 114: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 114

4.5.3 Stacker AssyParts/Components need to be removed in advance

Paper Support Assy/Rear Cover/Automatic Duplex Unit/Panel Unit/Upper Housing/Scanner Unit/Main Board Assy/Hinge Assy/Middle Housing

Removal procedure

1. Open the Stacker Assy.2. Release the two bosses in the order given in the figure, and remove the

Stacker Assy.

Figure 4-61. Removing the Stacker Assy

4.5.4 Printer MechanismParts/Components need to be removed in advance

Paper Support Assy/Rear Cover/Automatic Duplex Unit/Panel Unit/Upper Housing/Scanner Unit/Main Board Assy/Hinge Assy/Middle Housing/Power Supply Unit

Removal procedure

12

Stacker Assy

Boss Boss

CAUTION Where to hold the Printer MechanismTo avoid deformation of the frame, when hold up the Printer Mechanism, make sure to hold the marked parts as shown in the figure below.

Figure 4-62. Where to hold Printer Mechanism

Holding Position

Holding Position

Page 115: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 115

1. Disconnect the five connector cables and one FFC listed in the Table 4-8 from the connectors on the Sub Board, and release them from the Cable Guide.

2. Remove the screw and remove the Cable Guide.• Screw : (x1) C.B.P. M3x8 (tightening torque: 5-7 kgfcm)

Figure 4-63. Disconnecting/Releasing the Cables

3. Release the Waste Ink Tube from the slit and draw it out from between the Waste Ink Pads.

Figure 4-64. Removing the Waste Ink Tube (Printer Mechanism)

4. Remove the nine screws that secure the Printer Mechanism.• Screw : (x5) C.B.P. M3x8 (tightening torque: 5-7 kgfcm)• Screw : (x2) C.B.P.(P4), M3x8 (tightening torque: 5-7 kgfcm)• Screw : (x2) C.B.S. M3x8 (tightening torque: 7-9 kgfcm)

(The numbers shown in the figure indicate the order of tightening the screws.)

Figure 4-65. Removing the Screws (Printer Mechanism)

5. Peel off the PF Encoder FFC from the Lower Housing. (See Figure 4-68)6. Remove the Printer Mechanism from the Lower Housing referring to Figure

4-62 "Where to hold Printer Mechanism".

Table 4-8. Cables to DisconnectCN No. Color Destination Pins

CN1 White Main Board (CN6: Motor Relay) 6

CN2 FFC Main Board (CN11:Sensor Relay) 14

CN4 White CR Motor 2

CN5 Red ASF Motor 2

CN8 Yellow APG Phase Sensor 3

CN10 White ASF Encoder 4

CN8

CN5

CN4CN1

CN10

Sub Board

CN2

Cable Guide

Waste Ink Pad(Under Main Frame)

Waste Ink Tube

Rear

3

4

5

71

6

2

Top

8 9

Bottom

Page 116: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 116

REASSEMBLY When installing the Waste Ink Tube, push it in between the Waste Ink Pads until there is no slack as shown in Figure 4-64.When installing the Waste Ink Tube, route it from the cutout and secure it with three hooks and the slit of the Lower Housing as shown in Figure 4-66.

Figure 4-66. Installing the Waste Ink Tube

When installing the Cable Guide, route the connector cables and FFC as shown in Figure 4-65, and secure it with double-sided tape.

Figure 4-67. Installing the Cable Guide

Tighten the screws in the order given in Figure 4-65.

Waste Ink Tube

: HookCutout

Slit

Double-sided tape

Motor Relay cable

Cable Guide

ASF Motor cable

CR Motor cable

APG Phase Sensor

Sensor Relay FFC

ASF Encodercable

REASSEMBLY When installing the Printer Mechanism, make sure the connector cables are not caught between the frame and the mechanism. And secure the PF Encoder FFC with two double-sided tapes as shown in the figure below.

Figure 4-68. Caution on installing Printer Mechanism

ADJUSTMENTREQUIRED

When replacing the Printer Mechanism, carry out the adjustment referring to the following.

• Chapter 5 “ ADJUSTMENT” (p.151)

PF Encoder FFC Double-sided tape

Page 117: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 117

4.5.5 CR Scale

Parts/Components need to be removed in advancePaper Support Assy/Rear Cover/Automatic Duplex Unit/Panel Unit/Upper Housing/Scanner Unit/Main Board Assy/Hinge Assy/Middle Housing

Removal procedure

1. Unlock the carriage and move the Carriage Assy to the center.2. Release the CR Scale from the hook on the right side of the Main Frame.3. Pull out the CR Scale through the slit of the Carriage Assy.

Figure 4-69. Removing the CR Scale

4. Release the Extension Spring from the hook on the left side of the Main Frame.

5. Turn the CR Scale counterclockwise by 90 degrees and remove the CR Scale from the hook.

Figure 4-70. Removing the CR Scale

CAUTION Do not touch the reading surface of the CR Scale with bare hands, and take care not to damage or contaminate the surface.

CHECKPOINT

See the section given below on how to unlock the carriage.• 4.1.7 How to Unlock the Carriage

See the section given below for the definition of the directions indicated in the following procedures.

• 4.1.6 Orientation Definition

Opposite to HP

Carriage Assy

Right

CR Scale

Slit

REASSEMBLY Install the CR Scale with its cut-corner facing upward. Secure one end of the Extension Spring to the hole of the CR Scale from the back side of the CR Scale.

Figure 4-71. Installing the CR Scale

90 degrees

Remove

Step 4

Step 5

CR Scale

Left

Extension Spring

Leg of spring Cut-corner

Left

Page 118: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 118

4.5.6 Printhead

Parts/Components need to be removed in advance

Paper Support Assy/Rear Cover/Automatic Duplex Unit/Panel Unit/Upper Housing/Scanner Unit/Main Board Assy/Hinge Assy/Middle Housing

Removal procedure

1. Release the Carriage Lock and move the Carriage to the center, and remove all the Ink Cartridges.

2. Cut the Cartridge Cover Hinge with a nipper, and remove the upper half of it.3. Release the hooks of the lower half of the Cartridge Cover Hinge with

tweezers, and remove the lower half of it. (See Figure 4-72)

Figure 4-73. Removing the Cartridge Cover Hinge

4. While releasing the hook with a flat-head screwdriver or the like, remove the Inner Head FFC Cover by sliding it upward.

Figure 4-74. Removing the Inner Head FFC Cover

5. Remove the Head FFC Cover by sliding it in the direction of the arrow.

Figure 4-75. Removing the Head FFC Cover

CAUTION Do not use a tool with a sharp tip when removing the Head FFC Cover or/and the Inner Head FFC Cover to avoid any damage to them.

CHECKPOINT

The Cartridge Cover Hinge must be broken to be removed since the hinge is permanently-set. When replacing the Printhead, make sure to replace the Cartridge Cover Hinge with a new one.

Figure 4-72. Cartridge Cover Hinge

When releasing the Carriage Lock, refer to the following.• 4.1.7 How to Unlock the Carriage

As for the directions used in the procedures, refer to the Definition of the directions.

• 4.1.6 Orientation DefinitionThe Printhead can be replaced without removing the Middle Housing by using the special tool for the Upper Housing Removal (1108202). (The following Printhead removal procedure, however, is the procedure without using the tool.)

Cartridge Cover Hinge

(top)

Broken parts

Cartridge Cover Hinge

(bottom)

Hook

Cut here

HookCartridge

Cover Hinge

Inner Head FFC CoverHook

Head FFC Cover

Page 119: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 119

6. Disconnect the CSIC FFC from the connector on the CSIC Assy.

Figure 4-76. Removing the CSIC FFC

7. Remove the CSIC Assy as follows:

(1) Move the carriage to the end of the HP side, and release the hook A through the opening on the right back of the Main Frame with a flat-head screwdriver or the like.

(2) Move the carriage to the other end, and release the hook B in the same manner as the hook A through the left back of the Main Frame.

(3) Remove the CSIC Assy by sliding it upward.

Figure 4-77. Removing the CSIC Assy

8. Remove the three screws and lift the Printhead.• Screw : C.B.P. M2.6x8 (tightening torque: 3.5-4.5 Kgfcm)

(The numbers shown in the figure indicate the order of tightening the screws.)

Figure 4-78. Removing the Printhead (1)

9. Disconnect the two Head FFCs from the connectors at the bottom of the Printhead.

Figure 4-79. Removing the Printhead (2)

CSIC FFC

Connector

12

CSIC Assy

3

HP sideOpposite to HP

AB

Rear rightRear left

A B

CSIC Assy’s rear

CAUTION Be careful not to contaminate the surroundings with ink. And take care not to touch the surface of the nozzle (See Figure 4-79), or it may result in clogging.

12

3

Printhead

Printhead

Head FFC

Nozzle surface

Page 120: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 120

4.5.7 APG Assy/Sub Board/ASF Encoder/Retard ASF Assy

Parts/Components need to be removed in advance

Paper Support Assy/Rear Cover/Automatic Duplex Unit/Panel Unit/Upper Housing/Scanner Unit/Main Board Assy/Hinge Assy/Middle Housing/Power Supply Unit/Printer Mechanism

Removal procedure

1. Disconnect the six cables from the Sub Board.(Cables to be removed: CN3, CN6, CN7, CN9, CN11, CN13)

2. Remove the two screws and remove the Sub Board.• Screw : C.B.S. M3x6 (tightening torque: 7-9Kgfcm)

Figure 4-81. Removing the Sub Board

REASSEMBLY Tighten the screws of the Printhead in the order given in Figure 4-78.When installing the Head FFCs, fold them along the fold lines beforehand not to be caught in between.

Figure 4-80. Installing Head FFC

ADJUSTMENTREQUIRED

After reassembling the Printhead, carry out the adjustment referring to the following.

• Chapter 5 “ ADJUSTMENT” (p.151)

Head FFC

CHECKPOINT

See the section given below for the definition of the directions indicated in the following procedures.

• 4.1.6 Orientation Definition

CN9

CN7

CN6Sub Board

CN11

CN13

CN3

Page 121: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 121

3. Release the hook and remove the Combination Gear 28.7, 18 from the Retard ASF Assy.

Figure 4-82. Removing the Retard ASF Assy (1)4. Remove the screw, release the hook from the back side, and then remove the

Retard ASF Assy.• Screw : C.B.S. M3x6 (tightening torque: 7-9Kgfcm)

Figure 4-83. Removing the Retard ASF Assy (2)

5. Release the Motor Relay cable and Sensor Relay FFC from the four hooks shown in the figure below. At the same time, peel the double-sided tape for the FFC.

6. Release the hook on the front right side of the printer, slide the Cable Holder by sliding it in the direction of the arrow.

Figure 4-84. Removing the Cable Holder

7. Release the CR Motor cable, ASF Motor cable, and APG Phase Sensor cable from the hook on the upper surface and from the two hooks on the bottom surface of the APG Assy.

Figure 4-85. Removing the APG Assy (1)

8. Remove the three screws and remove the APG Assy while avoiding the ASF scale so as not to hit the ASF Encoder to it.• Screw : C.B.S. M3x6 (tightening torque: 7-9Kgfcm)

Figure 4-86. Removing the APG Assy (2)

Combination Gear 28.7,18

Retard ASF Assy

Hook

Back side

Hook

Motor Relay cable

Cable Holder

Sensor Relay FFC

APG Assy

Hook Double-sided tape

Front right

CAUTION When removing the APG Assy, take care not to damage the ASF Scale.

Hook

APG Assy

APG PhaseSensor cable

APG Assy’s top APG Assy’s bottom

CR Motor cable ASF Motor cable

Rear

Positioning hole/Tab

APG Assy

Remove ASF Encoder avoiding ASF Scale.

CAUTION

Page 122: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 122

REASSEMBLY When installing the APG Assy, see Figure 4-84 and Figure 4-85, and route the CR Motor cable, ASF Motor Cable, and APG Phase Sensor cable.In order to align the phase of the APG Assy with that of the CR Shaft, install the APG Assy matching the triangles facing each other as shown in Figure 4-87.

Figure 4-87. Aligning the phase of the APG Assy

Install the APG Assy so that the Ground Plate contacts the bottom of the ASF Sub Motor as shown in Figure 4-88.

Figure 4-88. Installing the Ground Plate

PG Cam R Combination Gear 40

Grounding Plate

APG Assy

Bottom

ASF Sub Motor

REASSEMBLY When installing the APG Assy, match the guide pin with the positioning hole as shown in Figure 4-86.When installing the Cable Holder, refer to the figure below and Figure 4-84, first match the hook on the back of the Cable Holder with the hole of the Main Frame, then slide the Cable Holder in the opposite to the disassembling direction while holding the hook on the right front side of the printer.

Figure 4-89. Installing the Harness Holder

When installing the Retard ASF Assy, make sure the Spur Gear Cam is engaged with the Spur Gear 11 as shown in Figure 4-90.

Figure 4-90. Confirming the Engagement of the gears

Hook (Back)

Inside right of Main Frame

Spur Gear Cam 27

Spur Gear 11

Page 123: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 123

4.5.8 Waste Ink Pads/FootParts/Components need to be removed in advance

Paper Support Assy/Rear Cover/Automatic Duplex Unit/Panel Unit/Upper Housing/Scanner Unit/Main Board Assy/Hinge Assy/Middle Housing/Power Supply Unit/Printer Mechanism

Removal procedure

Removing the Waste Ink Pads

1. Remove the twelve Waste Ink Pads from the trays of the Lower Housing.

Figure 4-92. Removing the Waste Ink Pad

REASSEMBLY When installing the APG Assy, attach the cutout of APG Assy to the cutout of the Main Frame as shown in Figure 4-91.

Figure 4-91. Installing the APG Assy

When installing the APG Assy, refer to the table below and Figure 4-81 and connect the cables to the Sub Board.

APG Assy

Cutout

Main Frame

Table 4-9. Connector types and connected partsCN No. Color Destination Pins

CN1 White Main Board (CN6: Motor Relay cable) 6CN2 FFC Main Board (CN11: Sensor Relay FFC) 14CN3 Black ASF Sub Motor 2CN4 White CR Motor 2CN5 Red ASF Motor 2CN6 White RH Sensor 3CN7 Black RP Sensor 3CN8 Yellow APG Phase Sensor 3CN9 Red Front ASF Retard Sensor 3CN10 White ASF Encoder 4CN11 White PE Sensor 3CN13 Yellow Automatic Duplex Unit Sensor 2CN14 White ASF Encoder 4

CAUTION When removing the Waste Ink Pad, take care not to contaminate the printer and surroundings with ink.

Waste Ink Pad

Lower Housing

Page 124: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 124

Removing the foot

1. Peel off the four feet from the Lower Housing.(The number shown in the figure indicate the order of installing the foots.)

Figure 4-93. Removing the foot

4.5.9 EJ Frame Assy/CDR Guide AssyParts/Components need to be removed in advance

Paper Support Assy/Rear Cover/Automatic Duplex Unit/Panel Unit/Upper Housing/Scanner Unit/Main Board Assy/Hinge Assy/Middle Housing/Power Supply Unit/Printer Mechanism

Removal procedure

1. Move the Carriage Assy to the home position side.2. Release the hook, remove the Spur Gear 24, and pull out the CDR Shaft in the

direction of the arrow.

Figure 4-95. Removing the CDR Shaft

REASSEMBLY When installing the Waste Ink Pads, push the edges of the pads under the ribs of the trays so that there is no floating or bending.

Figure 4-94. Installing the Waste Ink Pads

Install the feet in the order given in Figure 4-93.

1

23

4

Lower Housing

Waste Ink Pad

CHECKPOINT

See the section given below for the definition of the directions indicated in the following procedures.

• 4.1.6 Orientation Definition

CDR Shaft

Hook

Spur Gear 24

Page 125: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 125

3. Release the boss of the EJ Lever Link Right from the CDR Guide, turn the EJ Lever Link Right in the direction of the arrow, release the boss from the CDR Base Right, and remove the EJ Lever Link Right upward.

Figure 4-96. Removing the EJ Lever Link Right

4. Release the boss of the EJ Lever Link Left from the CDR Guide, turn the EJ Lever Link Left in the direction of the arrow, release the boss from the CDR Base Left, and remove the EJ Lever Link Left upward.

Figure 4-97. Removing the EJ Lever Link Left

5. Release the spring that secures the EJ Frame Assy and Main Frame from the hook of the EJ Frame Assy.

Figure 4-98. Removing the springs

6. Release the CDR Guide from the gears on the CDR Base Right/Left, release the boss of the CDR Guide, and remove the CDR Guide.

Figure 4-99. Removing the CDR Guide

EJ Lever Link Right

CDR Guide BossCDR

Base Right

CDR Guide

EJ Lever Link Left CDR Base Left

Boss

SpringSpring Spring

Hook

EJ Frame’s front left EJ Frame’s front right

CDR Guide

Boss

Gear Gear

CDRBase Left

CDRBase Right

Page 126: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 126

7. Remove the two screws and remove the CDR Base Right.• Screw : C.B.S(P4). M3x8 (tightening torque: 7-9Kgfcm)

Figure 4-100. Removing the CDR Base Right

8. Peel off the acetate tape and remove the ferrite core of the PF Motor cable.9. Remove the two screws and remove the CDR Base Left.

• Screw : C.B.S(P4). M3x8 (tightening torque: 7-9Kgfcm)

Figure 4-101. Removing the CDR Base Left

REASSEMBLY Lubrication is required. See the page given below for the lubrication information.

• Chapter 6 “ MAINTENANCE” (p.173)

Front right CDRBase Right

PF Motor cable

Ferrite core

Front bottom left

Acetate tape

Front bottom right CDRBase Left

REASSEMBLY When installing the EJ Lever Link Right/Left, see Figure 4-102 and check the following:(1) Insert the boss into the groove of the CDR Base Right/Left. (See

Figure 4-96 and Figure 4-97)(2) Insert the boss into the groove of the CDR Guide. (See Figure

4-102)

Figure 4-102. Installing the EJ Lever Link Right/Left

When installing the CDR Guide, follow the procedures below.(1) Before engaging the gears of the CDR Base Right/Left into the

grooves of the CDR Guide, make sure the rib of the CDR Guide is set above the CDR Mode Sensor on the CDR Base Right as shown in Figure 4-103. (See Figure 4-99)

(2) Make sure the CDR Guide is not tilted after installing it.(3) Insert the boss into the groove of the CDR Base Left. (See Figure

4-99)

Figure 4-103. Installing the CDR Guide (1)

RightLeft

EJ Lever Link Left EJ Lever Link Right

Groove

Rib

CDR Mode Sensor

CDR Base RightCDR Guide

Page 127: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 127

4.5.10 PF Encoder

Parts/Components need to be removed in advance

Paper Support Assy/Rear Cover/Automatic Duplex Unit/Panel Unit/Upper Housing/Scanner Unit/Main Board Assy/Hinge Assy/Middle Housing/Power Supply Unit/Printer Mechanism

Removal procedure

1. Peel off the acetate tape and remove the PF Encoder FFC from connector CN1.

2. Remove the screw and remove the PF Encoder.• Screw : C.B.S. M2.5x5 (tightening torque: 3.5-4.5 Kgfcm)

Figure 4-105. Removing the PF Encoder

REASSEMBLY When installing the CDR Base Right/Left, match the tab and hook with the positioning holes as shown in Figure 4-104.

Figure 4-104. Installing the CDR Base Right/Left

Tab Hook

Inside left of Main Frame Inside right of Main Frame

CAUTION Do not touch the PF Scale with bare hands, and take care not to damage or contaminate the PF Scale.

CHECKPOINT

See the section given below for the definition of the directions indicated in the following procedures.

• 4.1.6 Orientation Definition

LeftPF Encoder

FFC

Connector (CN1)

PF Scale

Acetate tape

Page 128: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 128

4.5.11 PF MotorParts/Components need to be removed in advance

Paper Support Assy/Rear Cover/Automatic Duplex Unit/Panel Unit/Upper Housing/Scanner Unit/Main Board Assy/Hinge Assy/Middle Housing/Power Supply Unit/Printer Mechanism/EJ Frame Assy/CDR Guide Assy

Removal procedure

1. Loosen the two screws that secure the PF Motor.2. Rotate the PF Motor along the groove to the full (upto the dotted line) to

loosen the tension of the PF Timing Belt.

Figure 4-107. Removing the PF Motor (1)

REASSEMBLY When installing the PF Encoder, take extra care not to damage the PF Scale.When installing the PF Encoder, match the positioning holes and pins shown in Figure 4-106.

Figure 4-106. Installing the PF Encoder

PF Encoder

Inside left of Main Frame

Positioning hole/pin

CHECKPOINT

See the section given below for the definition of the directions indicated in the following procedures.

• 4.1.6 Orientation Definition

Groove : Screw

PF Motor

PF Timing Belt

Left

Page 129: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 129

3. Remove the two screws and remove the PF Motor pulling its Pinion Gear out through the hole of the Main Frame.• Screw : C.P. M3x4 (tightening torque: 3-5 Kgfcm)

(The numbers shown in the figure indicate the order of tightening the screws.)

Figure 4-108. Removing the PF Motor (2)

4.5.12 CR MotorParts/Components need to be removed in advance

Paper Support Assy/Rear Cover/Automatic Duplex Unit/Panel Unit/Upper Housing/Scanner Unit/Main Board Assy/Hinge Assy/Middle Housing/Power Supply Unit/Printer Mechanism/APG Assy/Sub Board/ASF Encoder/Retard ASF Assy

Removal procedure

1. Remove the Extension Spring of the Driven Pulley Assy from the hook .

Figure 4-109. Removing the Extension Spring

REASSEMBLY When installing the Timing Belt, make sure to face its toothed surface inward.Install the CR Motor with its engraved surface facing downward.When installing the PF Motor and PF Timing Belt, follow the procedures below.1. Insert the Pinion Gear of the PF Motor through the hole.2. Tighten the screws to the extent that the PF Motor can move

along the groove.3. Rotate the PF motor along the groove to the position indicated

with the dotted line in Figure 4-108, then install the PF Timing Belt.

4. Adjust the tension of the PF Timing Belt referring to Chapter 5 “ ADJUSTMENT” (p.151), and tighten the screw in the order given in Figure 4-108.

ADJUSTMENTREQUIRED

When replacing the PF Motor/PF Timing Belt, the required adjustment must be carried out.

• Chapter 5 “ ADJUSTMENT” (p.151)

1

2HolePinion Gear

Remove

Left PF Motor

CHECKPOINT

See the section given below for the definition of the directions indicated in the following procedures.

• 4.1.6 Orientation Definition

CAUTION When removing the Extension Spring, support the Driven Pulley Assy with your hand to avoid the Driven Pulley Assy to come off from the Main Frame.

CAUTION Take care not to contaminate the Timing Belt with grease. The belt will deteriorate faster if grease adheres to it.

Driven Pulley Assy

Extension Spring

Rear Left

Page 130: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 130

2. Remove the Driven Pulley Assy and remove the Timing Belt from the Pinion Gear of the CR Motor.

Figure 4-110. Removing the CR Motor (1)

3. Remove the two screws and remove the CR Motor.• Screw : C.C. M3x4 (tightening torque: 3-5Kgfcm)

Figure 4-111. Removing the CR Motor (2)

4.5.13 Carriage AssyParts/Components need to be removed in advance

Paper Support Assy/Rear Cover/Automatic Duplex Unit/Panel Unit/Upper Housing/Scanner Unit/Main Board Assy/Hinge Assy/Middle Housing/Power Supply Unit/Printer Mechanism/APG Assy/Sub Board/ASF Encoder/Retard ASF Assy/CR Motor

Removal procedure

1. Move the Carriage Assy to the left side.2. Pull the Head FFC out of the ferrite core.

Figure 4-112. Removing the Head FFC (1)

3. Release the three hooks by sliding the Head FFC Holder in the direction of the arrow, and remove the Head FFC and Head FFC Holder while pulling the Head FFC out of the hole of the Main Frame.

Figure 4-113. Removing the Head FFC (2)

REASSEMBLY Lubrication is required. See the page given below for the lubrication information.

• Chapter 6 “ MAINTENANCE” (p.173)Install the CR Motor with its engraved surface facing upward.When installing the Timing Belt, make sure that it is not twisted and the toothed surface comes to the inner side.

ADJUSTMENTREQUIRED

When replacing the CR motor, the required adjustment must be carried out.

• Chapter 5 “ ADJUSTMENT” (p.151)

Pinion GearDriven Pulley Assy

Timing Belt

Remove

CR Motor

CHECKPOINT

See the section given below for the definition of the directions indicated in the following procedures.

• 4.1.6 Orientation Definition

Ferrite core

Head FFC

Front

Hook

Head FFC Holder

Head FFC

Main Frame

Page 131: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 131

4. Loosen the screw and turn the Parallelism Bushing L in the direction of the arrow to the full.

5. Release the L-shaped end of the Spring L and remove the Spring L from the Main Frame.

Figure 4-114. Removing the Carriage Assy (1)

6. Release the end of the Spring R from the hook of the Main Frame, and remove the Spring R.

7. Remove the Right PG Cam on the right end of the CR shaft, lift the right end of the CR Shaft, and remove the washer and compression spring.

Figure 4-115. Removing the Carriage Assy (2)

8. Lift the CR Shaft and release the ends of the CR Shaft (See Figure 4-114/Figure 4-115) in the order given in the figure below, and remove the Carriage Assy (including CR Shaft) from the Main Frame.

Figure 4-116. Removing the Carriage Assy (3)

9. Remove the Left PG Cam from the CR Shaft.10. Pull the CR Shaft out of the Carriage Assy.11. Remove the Timing Belt from the Carriage Assy.

Figure 4-117. Removing the Carriage Assy (4)

12. Disconnect the FFC from the CR Encoder, pull out the FFC through the two slits of the Carriage Assy, and remove the Head FFC.

Figure 4-118. Removing the Carriage Assy (5)

CAUTION Before turning the Parallelism Bushing L, mark the scale position of the Parallelism Bushing L with a marker, and pull the Parallelism Bushing towards you to avoid damaging its gear with the hook.

:Hook

Left

Parallelism Bushing L

Spring L

Bearing hole (L)

Bearing hole (R)HookRight

Spring R Washer

Rib

Right PG Cam Compressionspring

1 2

Carriage Assy

Bearing hole (R)Bearing hole (L)

CR Shaft

Carriage Assy

CR Shaft

Left PG Cam

Timing Belt

CR Encoder FFC

Connector

Slit (1)

Slit (2)

Page 132: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 132

REASSEMBLY Lubrication is required. See the page given below for the lubrication information.

• Chapter 6 “ MAINTENANCE” (p.173)When installing the Right PG Cam, install the compression spring and washer in that order from the inner side as shown in Figure 4-119.

Figure 4-119. Installing the Carriage Assy

Install the Left PG Cam as shown in Figure 4-117.After installing the Carriage Assy (CR Shaft), rotate the CR Shaft by rotating the Right PG Cam to check the following: (See Figure 4-182)

• The CDR Link Arm operates smoothly together with the Left PG Cam.

• The CDR Link Slider operates smoothly together with the CDR Link Arm, properly changing the CDR planetary gear.

Washer

Compressionspring

REASSEMBLY When installing the Timing Belt, make sure that it is not twisted and the toothed surface faces the inner side, and place the part with both surfaces toothed into the groove.

Figure 4-120. Installing the Timing Belt

Install the Carriage Assy with its guide hooked on the Main Frame.

Figure 4-121. Installing the Carriage Assy

ADJUSTMENTREQUIRED

When installing the Carriage Assy, the required adjustment must be carried out.

• Chapter 5 “ ADJUSTMENT” (p.151)

Outside

InsideGroove

Timing Belt Both surfaces toothed

Main Frame

Guide

Carriage Assy

Page 133: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 133

4.5.14 Paper Guide Upper L/R

Parts/Components need to be removed in advancePaper Support Assy/Rear Cover/Automatic Duplex Unit/Panel Unit/Upper Housing/Scanner Unit/Main Board Assy/Hinge Assy/Middle Housing/Power Supply Unit/Printer Mechanism/APG Assy/Sub Board/ASF Encoder/Retard ASF Assy/CR Motor/Carriage Assy/Rear ASF Assy/Change Lever

Removal procedure

1. Release the ends of the four springs on the rear side of the Paper Guide Upper L from the grooves.

2. Remove the screw that secures the Paper Guide Upper L.• Screw : C.B.S. M3x6 (tightening torque: 7-9 Kgfcm)

3. Release the two hooks by sliding the Paper Guide Upper L in the direction of the arrow, and remove the Paper Guide Upper L while releasing the sensor from the PE sensor.

4. Release the ends of the four springs on the rear side of the Paper Guide Upper R from the grooves.

5. Remove the screw that secures the Paper Guide Upper R.• Screw : C.B.S. M3x6 (tightening torque: 7-9 Kgfcm)

6. Release the two hooks by sliding the Paper Guide Upper R in the direction of the arrow, and remove the Paper Guide Upper R while avoiding the PE sensor so as not to hit the sensor cover to it.

Figure 4-124. Removing the Paper Guide Upper L/R

CAUTION Do not touch the roller surface with bare hands as it can adversely affect the print quality.The end of the springs (Thin x 2 and Thick x 2 pieces each) of the Paper Guide Upper L/R are secured with the hooks on the rear side. After removing the Paper Guide Upper L/R, secure the springs to their original position with the hook to prevent from the springs being lost.

Figure 4-122. Springs of Paper Guide Upper L/R (Rear Side)

CHECKPOINT

The ends of the springs A of the Paper Guide Upper L/R are secured at the position and the ends of the springs B at the position , respectively.

Figure 4-123. The Springs of the Paper Guide Upper L/R (Front Side)

Rear

Hooks

End of spring (thin)

End of spring (thick)

Paper Guide Upper R

Front

REASSEMBLY Lubrication is required. See the page given below for the lubrication information.

• Chapter 6 “ MAINTENANCE” (p.173)When installing the Paper Guide L/R, first release the ends of the springs that have been temporarily secured on the rear side, install the Paper Guide L/R, and then secure the ends of the springs again.When securing the ends of the springs on the rear side, refer to Figure 4-123 and make sure that the ends of the springs are secured properly on the front side.

1

2

Paper Guide Upper L Rear

Sensor cover

Paper Guide Upper R

Page 134: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 134

4.5.15 Paper Guide Rear/PE SensorParts/Components need to be removed in advance

Paper Support Assy/Rear Cover/Automatic Duplex Unit/Panel Unit/Upper Housing/Scanner Unit/Main Board Assy/Hinge Assy/Middle Housing/Power Supply Unit/Printer Mechanism/APG Assy/Sub Board/ASF Encoder/Retard ASF Assy/CR Motor/Carriage Assy/Rear ASF Assy/Change Lever/Paper Guide Upper L/R

Removal procedure

Removing the Paper Guide Rear

1. Release the four hooks and the two bearings of the PF Roller Shaft and remove the Paper Guide Rear by lifting it.

Figure 4-125. Removing the Paper Guide Rear

Removing the PE Sensor Cable

1. Disconnect the PE Sensor Cable from the PE Sensor.

Figure 4-126. Removing the PE Sensor Cable

CHECKPOINT

See the section given below for the definition of the directions indicated in the following procedures.

• 4.1.6 Orientation Definition

Paper Guide Rear Hook

Top

Bearing Bearing

PF Roller Shaft

REASSEMBLY Lubrication is required. See the page given below for the lubrication information.

• Chapter 6 “ MAINTENANCE” (p.173)When installing the Paper Guide Rear, firmly fit the PF Roller Shaft to the two bearings as shown in Figure 4-125.When installing the Paper Guide Rear, make sure the four hooks shown in Figure 4-125 are secured, and the three bearings shown in the figure below is installed on the Idle Roller Shaft.

Figure 4-127. Installing the Paper Guide Rear

PE Sensor cablePE Sensor

Connector

Bearing

Rear

Page 135: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 135

4.5.16 Rear ASF Assy/Change LeverParts/Components need to be removed in advance

Paper Support Assy/Rear Cover/Automatic Duplex Unit/Panel Unit/Upper Housing/Scanner Unit/Main Board Assy/Hinge Assy/Middle Housing/Power Supply Unit/Printer Mechanism/APG Assy/Sub Board/ASF Encoder/Retard ASF Assy

Removal procedure

Removing the Rear ASF Assy

1. Peel off the Lumiler L/R.

Figure 4-128. Removing the LD Roller Guide (1)

2. Push the two tabs that secure the LD Roller Guide and release the four hooks of the LD Roller Guide by sliding it upward.

Figure 4-129. Removing the LD Roller Guide (2)

3. Push down the Hopper and remove the LD Roller Guide while avoiding the rib marked with .

Figure 4-130. Removing the LD Roller Guide (3)

CHECKPOINT

See the section given below for the definition of the directions indicated in the following procedures.

• 4.1.6 Orientation Definition

Top Lumiler L/R

: Tab : Hook

Front LD Roller Guide

LD Roller Guide

Hopper

Page 136: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 136

4. Remove the Extension Spring Long (1), and Extension Spring Short (2) from the hooks (two each).

5. Release the leg of the Torsion Spring (3) from the hook.6. Release the connector cables of PE Sensor, RP Sensor, and RH Sensor from

the five hooks.

Figure 4-131. Removing the Cables and Springs (Rear ASF Assy)

7. Remove the screw that secures the Rear ASF Assy at the rear right.• Screw : C.B.S.(P4) M3x8 (tightening torque: 7-9 Kgfcm)

Figure 4-132. Removing the Rear ASF Assy (1)

8. Remove the screw in the front, and release the tab and the hooks (1), (2).• Screw : C.B.P. M3x8 (tightening torque: 5-7 Kgfcm)

Figure 4-133. Removing the Rear ASF Assy (2)

9. Release the hook at the right back, and release the Rear ASF Assy from the Main Frame.

Figure 4-134. Removing the Rear ASF Assy (3)

10. Release the PE Sensor cable from the hook of the Rear ASF Assy, and remove the Rear ASF Assy.

Figure 4-135. Removing the Rear ASF Assy (4)

1

2

3

Right

: Hook

PE Sensor cable

RP Sensor cableRH Sensor cable

Leg of Torsion Spring (3)

Rear left

Rear ASF Assy

12

Tab

Hook

Rear ASF Assy

Rear right

Hook

PE Sensor cable

Page 137: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 137

11. Release the hook and remove the Change Lever.

Figure 4-136. Removing the Change Lever

12. Remove the Change Slider from the Main Frame as follows:

(1) Release the tab of the Change Slider with a flat-head screwdriver or the like.

(2) Slide the Change Slider in the direction of the arrow, and remove it by matching the rib of it with the hole of the Main Frame.

Figure 4-137. Removing the Change Slider

4.5.17 ASF Sub Motor/RH Sensor/RP SensorParts/Components need to be removed in advance

Paper Support Assy/Rear Cover/Automatic Duplex Unit/Panel Unit/Upper Housing/Scanner Unit/Main Board Assy/Hinge Assy/Middle Housing/Power Supply Unit/Printer Mechanism/APG Assy/Sub Board/ASF Encoder/Retard ASF Assy/Rear ASF Assy/Change Lever

Removal procedure

Removing the ASF Sub Motor

1. Remove the two screws and remove the ASF Sub Motor Unit.• Screw : C.B.P. M3x6 (tightening torque: 5-7Kgfcm)

Figure 4-138. Removing the ASF Sub Motor Unit

Rear right

Change Slider

Change Lever

Hook

Tab

Tab

Change Slider

Rear right

CHECKPOINT

See the section given below for the definition of the directions indicated in the following procedures.

• 4.1.6 Orientation Definition

ASF Sub Motor Unit

Page 138: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 138

2. Remove the two screws and remove the ASF Sub Motor.• Screw : C.P. M2.5x3 (tightening torque: 3-5Kgfcm)

Figure 4-139. Removing the ASF Sub Motor

Removing the RH Sensor/RP Sensor

1. Remove the screw, release the hook, and remove the Rear ASF Sensor Assy.• Screw : C.B.P. M3x6 (tightening torque: 5-7Kgfcm)

Figure 4-140. Removing the Rear ASF Sensor Assy

2. Release the four hooks and remove the RH Sensor from the Rear ASF Sensor Assy.

3. Disconnect the connector cable (white) from the RH Sensor.

Figure 4-141. Removing the RH Sensor

4. Release the two hooks and remove the RP Sensor from the Rear ASF Sensor Assy.

5. Disconnect the connector cable (Black) from the RP Sensor.

Figure 4-142. Removing the RP Sensor

ASF Sub Motor Unit

ASF Sub Motor

: Hook

Rear ASF’s right

Rear ASF’s inside

Rear ASF Sensor Assy

REASSEMBLY When installing the Rear ASF Sensor Assy, engage the hook of the Rear ASF Sensor Assy with the groove of the Rear ASF Assy as shown in Figure 4-140. Install the ASF Sub Motor with its engraved surface facing upwards.Before installing the RH/RP Sensor cable, refer to Figure 4-141 and Figure 4-142 for each color of the cables.

RH Sensor

Cable : Hook

RP Sensor

: Hook

Cable

Page 139: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 139

4.5.18 LD roller/Retard Roller

Parts/Components need to be removed in advance

Paper Support Assy/Rear Cover/Automatic Duplex Unit/Panel Unit/Upper Housing/Scanner Unit/Main Board Assy/Hinge Assy/Middle Housing/Power Supply Unit/Printer Mechanism/APG Assy/Sub Board/ASF Encoder/Retard ASF Assy/Rear ASF Assy/Change Lever/ASF Sub Motor/RH Sensor/RP Sensor

Removal procedure

Removing the LD Roller

1. Remove the Hopper Gear and the RASF Planetary Gear.2. Release the hook from the inner side of the Rear ASF, and remove the ASF

Sensor Flag.3. Remove the ASF Flag Gear.

Figure 4-143. Removing the LD Roller (1)

4. Remove the Cover Ring of the Spur Gear 24LD and remove the Spur Gear 24LD.

Figure 4-144. Removing the LD Roller (2)

5. Release the hook of the LD Roller Bush on the outer right side of the Rear ASF Assy, and turn the LD Roller Bush in the direction of the arrow to match the two bosses on the inside with the two holes of the Rear ASF Assy.

6. Pull out the LD Roller Bush outward, and remove the LD Roller Bush.

Figure 4-145. Removing the LD Roller (3)

7. Release the boss of the bush that secures the LD Roller on the inner left side of the Rear ASF Assy, turn the bush in the direction of the arrow, and remove the bush out of the hole of the Rear ASF Assy by pushing the bush outward.

Figure 4-146. Removing the LD Roller (4)

CAUTION Do not touch the surface of the rollers of the LD Roller and Retard Roller as it can adversely affect the print quality.

CHECKPOINT

See the section given below for the definition of the directions indicated in the following procedures.

• 4.1.6 Orientation Definition

ASF Sensor Flag

Rear ASF’s inside

Hopper Gear

RASF Planetary Gear

ASF Flag Gear : Hook

Cover Ring

Right outside

Spur Gear 24LD

LD Roller Bush Boss

Right outside LD Roller Bush

: Hook

Bush Left outside

Match it with hole and push it out to removeLeft inside

Bush

Tab

Page 140: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 140

8. Slide the LD Roller in the direction of the arrow, and remove the LD Roller together with the Spur Gear 24LD.

Figure 4-147. Removing the LD Roller (5)Removing the Retard Roller

1. Remove the LD Roller. (Removing the LD Roller (p.139))2. Remove the spring of the Hopper Assy.

Figure 4-149. Removing the Hopper Assy (1)

3. Release the two bosses and remove the Hopper Assy.

Figure 4-150. Removing the Hopper Assy (2)

4. Remove the two Extension Springs that secure the Retard Roller Holder.

Figure 4-151. Removing the Retard Roller Holder

5. Remove the three Torsion Springs that secure the Paper Back Lever on the bottom of the Rear ASF Assy by: (1) releasing the longer end from the groove(2) removing the spring from the boss.

Figure 4-152. Removing the Torsion Springs

CAUTION Be careful not to damage or break the Switching Lever shown in the figure below.

Figure 4-148. Switching Lever

LD Roller

Spur Gear 24LD

Rear ASF’s bottom

Switching Lever

SpringHopper’s inside

Hopper Assy

: Boss

Extension Springs

Retard Roller Holder

Paper Back Lever

Torsion Springs

(1)

(2)

Page 141: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 141

6. Release the boss of the Paper Back Bush Right by extending the right side of the Rear ASF Assy outward, slide the boss along the groove on the inner side of the Rear ASF Assy, and remove the Paper Back Bush Right.

7. Release the boss of the Paper Back Bush Left by extending the left side of the Rear ASF Assy outward, slide the boss along the groove on the inner side of the Rear ASF Assy, and remove the Paper Back Bush Left together with the Torsion Spring.

Figure 4-153. Removing the Paper Back Lever (1)

8. Remove the Paper Back Lever from the bottom of the Rear ASF Assy.

Figure 4-154. Removing the Paper Back Lever (2)

9. Open the Retard Roller Holder on the bottom of the Rear ASF Assy, release the two bosses, and remove the Retard Roller Holder towards you.

Figure 4-155. Removing the Retard Roller Holder

10. Release the boss and remove the Retard Roller from the Retard Roller Holder.

Figure 4-156. Removing the Retard Roller Holder

Rear ASF Assy

Open up

RightSpring

Bush

Open up

Left

: Boss

Paper Back Bush Left

Paper Back Bush Right

: Boss

Bottom Paper Back Lever REASSEMBLY When installing the Paper Back Lever, make sure to install the three Torsion Springs as shown in Figure 4-152.

Retard Roller Holder

: Boss

Retard Roller

: Boss

Page 142: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 142

4.5.19 Ink System

Parts/Components need to be removed in advance

Paper Support Assy/Rear Cover/Automatic Duplex Unit/Panel Unit/Upper Housing/Scanner Unit/Main Board Assy/Hinge Assy/Middle Housing/Power Supply Unit/Printer Mechanism/APG Assy/Sub Board/ASF Encoder/Retard ASF Assy/Rear ASF Assy/Change Lever

Removal procedure

1. Insert a screwdriver through the opening of the Main Frame and remove the screw (2) that secures the Pump.

• Screw : C.B.S. M3x6 (tightening torque: 7-9 Kgfcm)2. Remove the screw that secures the Cap.

• Screw : C.B.S. M3x6 (tightening torque: 7-9 Kgfcm)

Figure 4-158. Removing the Ink System (1)

3. Slide the Ink System in the direction of the arrow, and remove the Ink System while avoiding the Main Frame.

Figure 4-159. Removing the Ink System (2)

CAUTION Take care not to contaminate the surroundings with ink.Extra care must be taken to avoid injury from sharp edges of the rib of the Main Frame.Be careful not to drop and damage the shaft of the Carriage Lock and the Compression Spring, as they easily come off.

Figure 4-157. Cautions when removing the Ink System

CHECKPOINT

See the section given below for the definition of the directions indicated in the following procedures.

• 4.1.6 Orientation Definition

Ink System

Spring

Compression Spring

Carriage Lock’s shaft

21Right

Opening

Cap Pump

Ink System

Page 143: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 143

4.5.20 ASF Motor AssyParts/Components need to be removed in advancePaper Support Assy/Rear Cover/Automatic Duplex Unit/Panel Unit/Upper Housing/Scanner Unit/Main Board Assy/Hinge Assy/Middle Housing/Power Supply Unit/Printer Mechanism/APG Assy/Sub Board/ASF Encoder/Retard ASF Assy/Rear ASF Assy/Change Lever

Removal procedure

1. Remove the two screws and remove the ASF Motor Assy.• Screw : C.B.S. M3x6 (tightening torque: 7-9 kgfcm)

Figure 4-162. Removing the ASF Motor Assy2. Remove the two screws and remove the ASF Motor.

• Screw : C.P. M2.6x5 (tightening torque: 3-5 kgfcm)

Figure 4-163. Removing the ASF Motor

REASSEMBLY Lubrication is required. See the page given below for the lubrication information.

• Chapter 6 “ MAINTENANCE” (p.173)When installing the Ink System, make sure the shafts of the Ink System are inserted into the bearings of the Main Frame .

Figure 4-160. Installing the Ink System (1)

When installing the Ink System, make sure the shaft of the gear is inserted into the bearing of the pump of the Ink System.

Figure 4-161. Installing the Ink System (2)

When installing the Ink System, tighten the screws in the order given in Figure 4-158.

Pump

: Shaft/Bearing

CAUTION Do not touch the ASF Scale with bare hands, and take care not to damage or contaminate the ASF Scale.

ASF Motor Assy

ASF Motor

Page 144: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 144

4.5.21 Rear Frame AssyParts/Components need to be removed in advancePaper Support Assy/Rear Cover/Automatic Duplex Unit/Panel Unit/Upper Housing/Scanner Unit/Main Board Assy/Hinge Assy/Middle Housing/Power Supply Unit/Printer Mechanism/APG Assy/Sub Board/ASF Encoder/Retard ASF Assy/CR Motor/Carriage Assy/Rear ASF Assy/Change Lever/Paper Guide Upper L/R/Paper Guide Rear/PE Sensor/Ink System

Removal procedure

1. Removing the four screws.• Screw : C.B.S. M3x6 (tightening torque: 7-9 kgfcm)

(The numbers shown in the figure indicate the order of tightening the screws.)

Figure 4-166. Removing the Rear Frame Assy (1)

REASSEMBLY Install the ASF Motor with its engraved surface facing downwards as shown in Figure 4-164.

Figure 4-164. Installing the ASF Motor

When installing the ASF Motor Assy, match the positioning hole with the rib as shown in Figure 4-165.

Figure 4-165. Installing the ASF Motor Assy

ADJUSTMENTREQUIRED

When the ASF Motor is replaced, the required adjustment must be carried out.

• Chapter 5 “ ADJUSTMENT” (p.151)

ASF Motor

Engraved surface

: Rib/Positioning hole

CHECKPOINT

See the section given below for the definition of the directions indicated in the following procedures.

• 4.1.6 Orientation Definition

34

12Main Frame

Rear Frame Assy

Rear

Top

Page 145: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 145

2. Lift the Main Frame, release the ribs of the Rear Frame Assy, and separate the Rear Frame Assy from the Main Frame.

Figure 4-167. Removing the Rear Frame Assy (2)

4.5.22 Paper Guide Front & EJ Roller Assy/PF Roller Assy

Parts/Components need to be removed in advance

Paper Support Assy/Rear Cover/Automatic Duplex Unit/Panel Unit/Upper Housing/Scanner Unit/Main Board Assy/Hinge Assy/Middle Housing/Power Supply Unit/Printer Mechanism/APG Assy/Sub Board/ASF Encoder/Retard ASF Assy/CR Motor/Carriage Assy/Rear ASF Assy/Change Lever/Paper Guide Upper L/R/Paper Guide Rear/PE Sensor/Ink System/Rear Frame Assy/EJ Frame Assy/CDR Guide Assy/PF Motor

Removal procedure

Removing the Paper Guide Front & EJ Roller Assy

1. Release the ends of the EJ Ground Spring from the grooves of the EJ Roller and Main Frame, and remove the EJ Ground Spring.

Figure 4-169. Removing the EJ Ground Spring

REASSEMBLY When installing the Rear Frame Assy, tighten the screws in the order given in Figure 4-166.When installing the Rear Frame Assy, make sure the ribs of the Rear Frame are inserted into the hole of the Main Frame as shown in Figure 4-167.Make sure the Planetary Gear and Spur Gear are engaged securely.

Figure 4-168. Engagement of the Gears

Left

: Rib

Right

: Rib

Planetary Gear

Spur Gear 30.4

CAUTION Do not touch the surface of the rubber roller of the EJ Roller Assy and the coated part of the PF Roller Assy as it can adversely affect the print quality.

CHECKPOINT

See the section given below for the definition of the directions indicated in the following procedures.

• 4.1.6 Orientation Definition

Front

Groove on EJ Roller

Groove on Main Frame

EJ Ground Spring

Main Frame

Page 146: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 146

2. Remove the E-ring from the EJ Roller Shaft using a flathead screwdriver or the like.

3. Release the boss of the bush and turn the bush in the direction of the arrow until it reaches the position marked with the red broken line.

Figure 4-170. Removing the E-ring/Bush

4. Remove the screw.• Screw : C.B.P. M3x8 (tightening torque: 5-7 kgfcm)

Figure 4-171. Removing the screw (Paper Guide Front & EJ Roller Assy)

5. Release the two bosses of the CDR Link Slider from the bearings of the CDR Link Arm using a flathead screwdriver or the like.

Figure 4-172. Releasing the CDR Link Slider

6. Slide the EJ Roller Shaft in the direction of the arrow, and release the EJ Roller Shaft from the bearing hole on the right side of the Main Frame.

7. Lift the EJ Roller Shaft side, and remove the Paper Guide Front & EJ Roller Assy while avoiding the opening on the left side of the Main Frame so as not to hit the EJ Roller Pulley.

Figure 4-173. Removing the Paper Guide Front & EJ Roller Assy

Removing the Waste Ink Pad

1. Remove the three Waste Ink Pads from the Paper Guide Front Assy.

Figure 4-174. Removing the Paper Guide Front

Opposite to HP

Boss (back)

Bush

E Ring

EJ Roller Shaft

HP side

Paper Guide Front & EJ Roller Assy

: Boss

Paper Guide Front

Opposite to HP

EJ Roller Shaft

CDR Link ArmCDR Link Slider

Paper Guide Front & EJ Roller Assy

PF Roller Shaft

EJ Roller Shaft

Bearing hole

Opening

EJ Roller Pulley

3 2 1 Paper Guide FrontWaste Ink Pads

Page 147: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 147

Removing the PF Roller Assy

1. Remove the screw that secures the Parallelism Bushing L, and remove the Parallelism Bushing L while releasing the boss from inside of the frame.

• Screw : C.B.S. M3x6 (tightening torque: 7-9 kgfcm)2. Remove the Film Sheet.

Figure 4-175. Removing the Parallelism Bushing L

3. Release the ends of the PF Ground Spring from the groove of the PF Roller Shaft and the hole of the Main Frame, and remove the PF Ground Spring.

4. Release the boss of the Left Bush from the Main Frame, and turn the Left Bush in the direction of the arrow until it reaches the dotted line.

Figure 4-176. Removing the PF Ground Spring and releasing the Left Bush

5. Release the boss of the Right Bush from the Main Frame, and turn the Right Bush in the direction of the arrow (1) until it reaches the position marked with .

6. Slide the Right Bush in the direction of the arrow (2), and remove the Right Bush from the frame.

Figure 4-177. Releasing the Right Bush

7. Slide the PF Roller Assy slightly, release the right end of the PF Roller Assy from the frame toward you, pull the PF Roller Assy out of the opening of the Main Frame to the left, and remove the PF Roller Assy.

Figure 4-178. Removing the PF Roller Assy

Boss

PF Roller Shaft

Parallelism Bushing L

Film Sheet

PF Ground Spring

Boss (Back)

Left Bush

PF Roller Shaft

Hole on Main Frame

CAUTION When pulling the PF Roller Assy out of the opening of the Main Frame, take care not to damage the coated part of the PF Roller Assy with the Main Frame.

1

2

PF Roller Shaft Right Bush

Boss (Back)

PF Roller Assy

Opening

Page 148: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 148

REASSEMBLY Lubrication is required. See the page given below for the lubrication information.

• Chapter 6 “ MAINTENANCE” (p.173)When installing the Paper Guide Front & EJ Roller Assy, put the ends of the Waste Ink Pad (3) into the box of the Paper Guide Lower, and insert them into the hole of the box.

Figure 4-179. Installing the Paper Guide Front & EJ Roller Assy (1)

Install the Film Sheet shown in Figure 4-175, aligning the mark-off line on the Main Frame.Make sure the two grooves of the PF Gear 12 of the PF Roller Assy are engaged with the Spring Pin as shown in the figure below.

Figure 4-180. Installing the PF Roller Assy

Make sure the frame side end of the PF Ground Spring is hooked downwards from the hole as shown in Figure 4-180.

Into Box through the hole

Hole on box

Box

Paper Guide Lower

Waste Ink Pad (3)

GND Spring PFSpring Pin

PF Gear 12

Hole and frame side end of spring

REASSEMBLY Before engaging the boss of the CDR Link Slider into the bearing of the CDF Link Arm, make sure the CDR Planetary Gears are positioned at the upper side with the triangular part of CDR Link Slider between the gears.(See Figure 4-172)

Figure 4-181. Installing the Paper Guide Front & EJ Roller Assy (2)

After engaging the CDR Link Slider into the bearings of the CDR Link Arm, make sure the CDR Link Arm and CDR Link Slider move smoothly in the directions of the arrows.

Figure 4-182. Installing the Paper Guide Front & EJ Roller Assy (3)

Triangular part

CDR Planetary Gear CDR Link Slider

CDR Link Slider

CDR Link Arm

CDR Planetary Gear

Page 149: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 149

4.5.23 Paper Guide Bank Assy

Parts/Components need to be removed in advance

Paper Support Assy/Rear Cover/Automatic Duplex Unit/Panel Unit/Upper Housing/Scanner Unit/Main Board Assy/Hinge Assy/Middle Housing/Power Supply Unit/Printer Mechanism/APG Assy/Sub Board/ASF Encoder/Retard ASF Assy/CR Motor/Carriage Assy/Rear ASF Assy/Change Lever/Paper Guide Upper L/R/Paper Guide Rear/PE Sensor/Ink System/Rear Frame Assy

Removal procedure

1. Remove the two screws.• Screw : C.B.S. M3x6 (tightening torque: 7-9 kgfcm)

Figure 4-183. Removing the Paper Guide Bank Assy (1)

2. Release the bosses (1), (2) on the right side and the boss (3) on the left side, and pull the right side of the Paper Guide Bank Assy towards you to release the boss (4) on the left side.

3. Pull out the end of the lever of the Retard Reset Shaft from the groove of the Spur Gear Cam 27, and remove the Paper Guide Bank Assy.

Figure 4-184. Removing the Paper Guide Bank Assy (2)

CAUTION Do not touch the surface of the rubber roller of the Front Retard Roller and the Idol Roller so as not to degrade the print quality.

CHECKPOINT

See the section given below for the definition of the directions indicated in the following procedures.

• 4.1.6 Orientation Definition

Bottom

Paper Guide Bank Assy

REASSEMBLY Lubrication is required. See the page given below for the lubrication information.

• Chapter 6 “ MAINTENANCE” (p.173)When installing the Paper Guide Front Assy, insert the end of the lever of the Retard Reset Shaft into the groove of the Spur Gear Cam 27 as shown in the figure below. In addition, make sure the Spur Gear Cam 27 rotates before tightening the screws.

Figure 4-185. Installing the Paper Guide Bank Assy

1

23

4

End of lever Paper Guide Bank Assy

Spur Gear Cam 27 Retard Reset Shaft

: Boss

Rear

Pull out the right side

Retard Reset Shaft

RearSpur Gear Cam 27Spur Gear Cam 27

Lever of Retard Reset ShaftEnd of leverGroove

Page 150: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling the Major Parts/Components 150

4.5.24 Paper Guide Lower AssyParts/Components need to be removed in advancePaper Support Assy/Rear Cover/Automatic Duplex Unit/Panel Unit/Upper Housing/Scanner Unit/Main Board Assy/Hinge Assy/Middle Housing/Power Supply Unit/Printer Mechanism/APG Assy/Sub Board/ASF Encoder/Retard ASF Assy/CR Motor/Carriage Assy/Rear ASF Assy/Change Lever/Paper Guide Upper L/R/Paper Guide Rear/PE Sensor/Ink System/Rear Frame Assy/CDR Guide Assy/PF Motor/Paper Guide Front & EJ Roller Assy/PF Roller Assy

Removal procedure

Removing the Waste Ink Pad1. Remove the Waste Ink Pads from the Paper Guide Lower Assy.

Figure 4-186. Removing the Waste Ink Pads (Paper Guide Lower Assy)

CAUTION When removing the Waste Ink Pads, take care not to contaminate the surroundings with ink.

Waste Ink Pad

Paper Guide Lower Assy

REASSEMBLY Install the Waste Ink Pads inserting their slits over the ribs of the Paper Guide Lower Assy, pressing down the Waste Ink Pads so that there is no floating or bending.

Figure 4-187. Installing the Waste Ink Pads

: Rib

Waste Ink Pad

Page 151: RX680 Service Manual

C H A P T E R

5DJUSTMENT

A
Page 152: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

A 152

5.Thpri

5.Th

how to carry out the adjustments and media ustments, see the instructions displayed by the m.

line Tool

PG

ss gauges. Make a proper er the manually-moved inst the gauges placed on the

• Thickness Gauge 1.1mm, 1.3mm

PF

elt Tension Adjustment”. • Tension gauge• Tweezers• (+) Phillips

screwdriver

FD

elt Tension Adjustment”. • Tension gauge• Tweezers• (+) Phillips

screwdriver

E

in board before removing it. and load the EEPROM data to

• Adjustment Program

In rket settings are automatically • Adjustment Program

U inter. The ID is automatically • Adjustment Program

He label attached on the matically written to the main

• Adjustment Program

InO

• Adjustment Program

DJUSTMENT Adjustment Items and Overview

1 Adjustment Items and Overviewis chapter describes adjustments necessary after the disassembly/reassembly of the nter.

1.1 Servicing Adjustment Item Liste adjustment items of this product are as follows.

CHECKPOINT

For information on required for the adjAdjustment Progra

Table 5-1. Adjustment ItemsAdjustment Item Purpose Method Out

Adjustment

Install the Head Nozzle surface parallel to the printing surface and set the gap between the paper and the Head Nozzle surface to the specified value.

Mechanical adjustment using the thickneadjustment according to the result whethcarriage (printhead) runs over or hits agaplaten.

belt tension adjustment

This adjustment is made to avoid the idling of the PF motor (fatal error), breaking of the motor coil due to an abnormal heat, or lost of paper feed accuracy that causes banding on the printout.

For adjustment method, see “5.3.2 PF B

belt tension adjustment

This adjustment is made to avoid the idling of the ASF motor (fatal error) or breaking of the motor coil due to an abnormal heat.

For adjustment method, see “5.3.3 FD B

EPROM data copy

When the main board needs to be replaced, use this to copy adjustment values stored on the old main board to the new board. If this copy is completed successfully, all the other adjustments required after replacing the main board are no longer be necessary.

Readout the EEPROM data from the maThen replace the board with a new one, the new board.

itial setting This must be carried out after replacing the main board to apply settings for the target market.

Select the target market. The selected mawritten to the main board.

SB ID Input Sets a USB ID of the printer. A computer identifies the printer by the ID when multiple same models are connected via a USB hub.

Enter the product serial number of the prgenerated and written to the main board.

ead ID InputThis must be carried out after replacing the printhead in order to enter the new printhead ID (Head ID) that reduces variation between printheads.

Enter the ID printed on the Head QR codprinthead. The correction values are autoboard.

itialize PF Deterioration ffset

Resets the counter to maintain paper feed accuracy which decreases due to paper dust.

Reset the counter to its default.

Page 153: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

A 153

DO

000). • Adjustment Program

TA

ed. Examine the lines printed per, and enter the value for the r the bottom edge.

• Adjustment Program• Ruler

H ted. Examine the printed lines lines.

• Adjustment Program

B amine the patterns and enter overlap for each mode.

• Adjustment Program

Fipoad

Examine the lines printed near value for the line that is

• Adjustment Program• Ruler

PWmine the printout patterns and 5mm away from the paper ottom.

• Adjustment Program• Ruler

PFad

ine the printout patterns and correction value is registered.

• Adjustment Program

B

d by a specified scanner. tion value is automatically ROM on the main board.nting in the corresponding

• Adjustment Program• Specified Scanner• PFP base scale

PF

d by a specified scanner. tion value is automatically ROM on the main board.nting in the corresponding

• Adjustment Program• Specified Scanner• PFP base scale

Cco

orrection values are • Adjustment Program

line Tool

DJUSTMENT Adjustment Items and Overview

isenable PF Deterioration ffset

When reading the counter value from the old main board is impossible in the case of replacing the board, use this to set the counter to its maximum value.

Set the counter to tis maximum value (3

OP Margin djustment

Rear feed This corrects top margin of printout. A top margin adjustment pattern is printnear the top or the bottom edge of the paline that is 5±1 mm away from the top oFront feed

ead angular adjustment This must be carried out after replacing the printhead in order to correct tilt of the printhead by software.

A head angular adjustment pattern is prinand enter the value for the most straight

i-D adjustment Corrects print start timing in bi-directional printing to improve the print quality.

A Bi-D adjustment pattern is printed. Exthe value for the pattern with no gap and

rst dot sition justment

Rear feed This corrects left margin of printout. The print start position in the carriage moving direction is corrected by software.

A first dot adjustment pattern is printed. the left edge of the printout and enter theexactly 5 mm away from the left edge.Front feed

adjustmentThis adjustment is made to correct the mounting position of the PW Sensor on a software basis to adjust the detection position and Nozzle position dispersion.

A PW adjustment pattern is printed. Exaenter the value for the line that is exactlyedge for each of the left, right, top and b

justment

Rear feed Corrects variations in paper feed accuracy when using the Microweave to achieve higher print quality.

A PF adjustment pattern is printed. Examselect the value for the best pattern. TheFront feed

RS adjustment

This adjustment is made to ensure both high print quality (less banding) and high print speed in the target print mode by carrying out 1-path printing correcting ink drop amount for each raster mode. For more details, see “2.4 Banding Reduction System (BRS) / Paper Feed Amount Profile Correction (PFP) (p.54)

Print the adjustment pattern to be scanneAccording to the scanned result, a correccalculated and stored into the serial flashThe correction value is applied when primode.

P adjustment

This adjustment is made to ensure both high print quality and high print speed in the target print mode by measuring the paper feed errors at various points and calculating a correction value for each of the points. For more details, see “2.4 Banding Reduction System (BRS) / Paper Feed Amount Profile Correction (PFP) (p.54)

Print the adjustment pattern to be scanneAccording to the scanned result, a correccalculated and stored into the serial flashThe correction value is applied when primode.

R motor heat protection ntrol

This must be carried out for efficient heat control of the CR motor. Electrical variation is measured to acquire correction values after replacing the CR motor, main board, power supply board, CR shaft or the printer mechanism.

Select the parts that you replaced. The cautomatically written to the main board.

Table 5-1. Adjustment ItemsAdjustment Item Purpose Method Out

Page 154: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

A 154

PFco

ion values are • Adjustment Program

Aco

ion values are • Adjustment Program

Tool

He g, then execute nozzle • Adjustment Program

W using / Paper Guide • Adjustment Program

In ly performed. Print a e firing ink properly.

• Adjustment Program

Tool

Finpri

atically. • Adjustment Program

EE ut and stored as a file. • Adjustment Program

Prch

ut. • Adjustment Program

Tool

DJUSTMENT Adjustment Items and Overview

motor heat protection ntrol

This must be carried out for efficient heat control of the PF motor. Electrical variation is measured to acquire correction values after replacing the PF motor, main board, power supply board or the printer mechanism, or after performing the PF belt tension adjustment.

Select the parts that you replaced. The correctautomatically written to the main board.

SF motor heat protection ntrol

This must be carried out for efficient heat control of the ASF motor. Electrical variation is measured to acquire correction values after replacing the ASF motor, main board, power supply board or the printer mechanism.

Select the parts that you replaced. The correctautomatically written to the main board.

Table 5-2. Maintenance ItemsMaintenance Item Purpose Method Outline

ad Cleaning This function is used to execute Cleaning efficiently when ink is not delivered from the Head properly, e.g. dot missing.

Use the adjustment program to execute Cleanincheck printing.

aste ink pad counter The printer causes a maintenance error when the waste ink pad counter reaches its maximum. Use this to reset the counter after replacing the Waste Ink Pad. If you find the counter is close to the maximum during servicing, carry out the pad replacement and the counter reset to avoid the printer returned from the user due to the maintenance error.

After replacing the Waste Ink Pad (Lower HoFront), reset the counter to its default.

k charge This must be carried out after replacing the printhead in order to fill ink inside the new printhead. The printhead becomes ready for print.

Filling ink inside the printhead is automaticalnozzle check pattern to check if all nozzles ar

Table 5-3. Additional FunctionsAdditional Functions Purpose Method Outline

al check pattern nt

A4 size Use this to check if the all adjustments have been properly made.

The all adjustment patterns are printed autom

US Letter size

PROM dump Use this to readout the EEPROM data for analysis. The all EEPROM data is automatically reado

inter information eck

Manual CL counter Use this to readout information on the printer operations.

The printer information is automatically reado

I/C exchange CL counter

Timer CL counter

Print pass counter

Number of printouts

Fatal error code

Table 5-1. Adjustment ItemsAdjustment Item Purpose Method Outline

Page 155: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

A 155

5.Th r replaced, and check which adjustment(s) must be car

Nostment is not required.stments must be carried out, be sure to carry out them in

15 16 17 18 19 20 21

PW a

djus

tmen

t

PF a

djus

tmen

t

BR

S ad

just

men

t

PFP

adju

stm

ent

CR

mot

or h

eat

prot

ectio

n co

ntro

l

PF m

otor

hea

t pr

otec

tion

cont

rol

ASF

mot

or h

eat

prot

ectio

n co

ntro

l

Rea

r

Fron

t

--- --- O --- O --- --- ---

--- --- O --- O --- --- ---

O O O O --- --- --- ---

O O O O --- --- --- ---

M

--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

--- --- --- --- --- O O O

O O O O O O O O

--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

--- --- --- --- --- O O O

--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CD--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO O O O --- --- --- ---

O O O O --- --- --- ---

P

DJUSTMENT Adjustment Items and Overview

1.2 Required Adjustmentse table below lists the required adjustments depending upon the parts being repaired or replaced. Find the part(s) you removed oried out.

te : <Meaning of the marks in the table>“O” indicates that the adjustment must be carried out. “O*” indicates that the adjustment is recommended. “---” indicates that the adjuIf you have removed or replaced multiple parts, make sure to check the required adjustments for the all parts. And when multiple adjuthe order given in the “Priority” row.

Table 5-4. Adjustment ItemsPriority 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

PG a

djus

tmen

t

PF b

elt t

ensi

on

adju

stm

ent

FD b

elt t

ensi

onad

just

men

t

EE

PRO

M d

ata

copy

Initi

al se

ttin

g

USB

ID in

put

Hea

d ID

inpu

t

Was

te in

k pa

d co

unte

r

Ink

char

ge

Initi

aliz

e PF

det

erio

ratio

n of

fset

Dis

enab

le

PF d

eter

iora

tion

offs

et

Top

mar

gin

adju

stm

ent

Hea

d an

gula

r ad

just

men

t

Bi-D

adj

ustm

ent

Firs

t dot

pos

ition

adju

stm

ent

Low

er

Hou

sing

Fron

t Pa

per

Gui

de

Rea

r

Fron

t

Rea

r

Fron

t

Rea

r

Front ASFCover Assy

Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- O O

Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- O O

PrintheadRemove O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O O O O O

Replace O --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- O --- --- O O O O O O

ain Board

Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

Replace(Read OK)

--- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

Replace(Read NG)

--- --- --- --- O O O O O --- --- O O O O O O O

PS BoardRemove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

APG AssyRemove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

R Guide AssyRemove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

arriage AssyRemove O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O O O O O

Replace O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O O O O O

Adjustment Item

art Name

Page 156: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

A 156

Re--- O --- --- O --- --- ---

--- O --- --- O --- --- ---

M--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

O O O O O O O O

W--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

P --- --- O --- O --- --- ---

--- --- O --- O --- --- ---

P --- --- O --- O --- --- ---

--- --- O --- O --- --- ---

P --- O O O O --- --- ---

--- O O O O --- --- ---

--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

--- --- --- --- --- O --- ---

--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

--- --- --- --- --- --- --- O

--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

PF--- O O --- O --- O ---

--- O O --- O --- O ---

--- O* O* O* --- --- O ---

--- O O O --- --- O ---

WP

--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

15 16 17 18 19 20 21

PW a

djus

tmen

t

PF a

djus

tmen

t

BR

S ad

just

men

t

PFP

adju

stm

ent

CR

mot

or h

eat

prot

ectio

n co

ntro

l

PF m

otor

hea

t pr

otec

tion

cont

rol

ASF

mot

or h

eat

prot

ectio

n co

ntro

l

Rea

r

Fron

t

P

DJUSTMENT Adjustment Items and Overview

ar ASF AssyRemove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

Printer echanism

Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

Replace O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- O O O O O O

aste Ink PadRemove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

aper Guide Bank Assy

Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- O O

Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- O O

aper Guide Rear

Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O --- --- --- O

Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O --- --- --- O

aper Guide Upper L/R

Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O --- --- --- ---

Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O --- --- --- ---

CR MotorRemove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O* --- ---

Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O* --- ---

ASF MotorRemove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

Ink SystemRemove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

Roller AssyRemove O* O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O* --- ---

Replace O* O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O* --- ---

PF MotorRemove --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

Replace --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

aste Ink Padsaper Guide

Front

Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

Table 5-4. Adjustment ItemsPriority 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

PG a

djus

tmen

t

PF b

elt t

ensi

on

adju

stm

ent

FD b

elt t

ensi

onad

just

men

t

EE

PRO

M d

ata

copy

Initi

al se

ttin

g

USB

ID in

put

Hea

d ID

inpu

t

Was

te in

k pa

d co

unte

r

Ink

char

ge

Initi

aliz

e PF

det

erio

ratio

n of

fset

Dis

enab

le

PF d

eter

iora

tion

offs

et

Top

mar

gin

adju

stm

ent

Hea

d an

gula

r ad

just

men

t

Bi-D

adj

ustm

ent

Firs

t dot

pos

ition

adju

stm

ent

Low

er

Hou

sing

Fron

t Pa

per

Gui

de

Rea

r

Fron

t

Rea

r

Fron

t

Rea

r

Adjustment Item

art Name

Page 157: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

A 157

5.ThFome

5.Pat

Ho

Melin

tment.

r the two print directions; “0 to 80” (from om the other end to home).

ular Adjustment Pattern (1)

the value (-10 to 10) for the most straight lines.

lines, it indicates that the printhead is not head and carry out this adjustment again.

0 2 4 6 8 10

Angular band pattern :

G OK

DJUSTMENT Adjustment by Using Adjustment Program

2 Adjustment by Using Adjustment Program is section explains how to judge print samples by using the adjustment program. llow the instructions of the adjustment program for details of the adjustment thods.

2.1 Top Margin Adjustment (Rear/Front)terns are printed as shown below.

w to Judge

asure the distance from the paper edge to the printed line. Enter the value for the e that is exactly 5 mm away from the edge.

Figure 5-1. Top Margin Adjustment Pattern

5.2.2 Head Angular AdjusTwo patterns are printed as shown below

Band pattern

The following pattern is printed each fohome to the other end) and “80 to 0” (fr

Figure 5-2. Head Ang

How to Judge

Examine the printout patterns and enter

Additional information

When “10” or “-10” is the most straightinstalled correctly. Reassemble the print

-9-8-7

-6-5

-4-3

-2-1

01

23

45

67

89

-9-8-7

-6-5

-4-3

-2-1

01

23

45

67

89

5mm

5mm

Top margin printout pattern

Bottom margin printout pattern

CHECKPOINT

Example for judgement

-8-10 -6 -4 -2

Sample of Head

N

Page 158: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

A 158

Ho

Exgap

Ad

Whsm

ach of the 4 print modes.

Adjustment Pattern

s of the left and right pattern, and enter the

nter the nearest value and then print the

CP

4 5 6 7

OK NG

Gap

DJUSTMENT Adjustment by Using Adjustment Program

Microweave Pattern

Figure 5-3. Head Angular Adjustment Pattern (2)

w to Judge

amine the printout +2 to -2 patterns and select the value for the group of which the s between the 2 color bars are the smallest.

ditional information

en “+3” or “-3” is the group of which the gaps between the 2 color bars are the allest, reassemble/replace the printhead.

5.2.3 Bi-D AdjustmentThe pattern shown below is printed for e

Figure 5-4. Bi-D

How to Judge

Find the pattern with no gaps or overleapvalue of that pattern.

Additional information

If an appropriate pattern is not printed, epatterns again.

HECKOINT

Example for judgement

+3 +2 +1 0 -1 -2 -3

NGOK

Gap

CHECKPOINT

Example for judgement

2 3-1 0 1

NG

Overlap

Page 159: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

A 159

5.Pat

Ho

Mefor

Ex

Adjustment Pattern

away from each edge.

(top), “5” (bottom), “-3” (left) and “0” (right).

-8-7-6-5-4-3-2-1012345678910111213141516171819

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

-5-4-3-2-1012345

5mm

justment pattern line

DJUSTMENT Adjustment by Using Adjustment Program

2.4 First Dot Position Adjustment (Front/Rear)terns are printed as shown below.

Figure 5-5. First Dot Position Adjustment Pattern

First dot position adjustment pattern

w to Judge

asure the distance from the left edge of the paper to the printed line. Enter the value the line that is exactly 5 mm away from the edge.

ample: In the above figure, enter “-3”.

5.2.5 PW AdjustmentPatterns are printed as shown below.

Figure 5-6. PW

PW adjustment

How to Judge

Enter the value of the line located 5mm

Example: In the above figure, enter “0”

-8-7-6-5-4-3-2-1012345678910111213141516171819

Line

-5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4

6789101112131415

-8-7-6-5-4-3-2-1012345678910111213141516171819

PW ad

Page 160: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

A 160

5.

Pat

Ho

Enlow

nt (Bottom Edge Area) Pattern

which has no gap between the upper pattern pper and lower patterns do not overlap each

elow “4” has no gap and overlap, so input “4”.

lap, select the value for the pattern which has ttern again.

CP

4 5 6 7 8

OK NG

Gap

DJUSTMENT Adjustment by Using Adjustment Program

2.6 PF Adjustment (Rear/Front)PF-Standard Area

terns are printed as shown below.

Figure 5-7. PF Adjustment (Standard Area) Pattern

w to Judge

ter the value for the group that has no gap or overlap between the upper and the er patterns.

PF-Bottom Edge Area

Patterns are printed as shown below.

Figure 5-8. PF Adjustme

How to Judge

Input the value shown above the patternsand the lower pattern, and also the both uother.

Example: In the above figure, patterns b

Additional information

In case that all patterns have gap or overthe least gap or overlap, and print the pa

HECKOINT

Example for judgement

5

3

1

-1

-3

-5

4

2

0

-2

-4

OK NGNG

CHECKPOINT

Example for judgement

2 31

Lower block

Upper block

NG

Overlap

Page 161: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

A 161

5.Th

5.De

sition at PG Adjustment

PG<A

PG<Mde

PG

C

PG

to be used must be free from dust and dirt n. Be sure to clean it before use.

rint Head is not soiled or scratched.racy of adjustment, install new ink riage, and move the carriage right and left ithout holding the carriage.

t after installing the mechanism unit in the tall the Linear Scale after adjustment.)er Mechanism” (p.114) Photo RX680/RX685/RX690, four stages ilable by means of the APG Mechanism. adjustment with the mechanism in the n (PG-: 1.2 mm). Assy/Sub Board/ASF Encoder/Retard nd below.)

ith each other

DJUSTMENT Adjustment without Using Adjustment Program

3 Adjustment without Using Adjustment Programis section explains the adjustment procedure without using the adjustment program.

3.1 PG Adjustmentscribed below is the platen gap (PG) adjustment.

Purpose:Adjust the distance between the head surface and the Paper Guide Front Assy (platen) properly and adjust the parallelism on the 0th column side and on the 80th columns side to ensure reliable print quality.Once the Carriage Assy and/or Adjustment Bushes have been removed or whenever necessary for any other reason, make this adjustment to correct the deviation of the platen gap.

Things to be used

Thickness gauge: 1.1 mm (x2)1.3 mm (x2)

Phillips screwdriver Figure 5-9. PG Po

Table 5-5. PG Positions

Position PG Size(mm)

Application for Printing(selected from PG flag list for

normal/head rubbing)

Sequence Application

-PG Home> 1.2 EPSON special paper

PGPP, Postcards, Matte, etc.

Capping, wiping,In stand-by after power on

typ.echanical

fault>1.7

Plain paperSelect when PG- is too narrow

---

+ 2.35EnvelopesSelect when PG typ. is too narrow

---

DR 4.2 --- During CDR guide operation

++ 4.2CD-R printingSelect when PG+ is too narrow

At ink replacement

CAUTION The thickness gaugeand from deformatioTake care that the PTo ensure high accucartridges in the carby pulling the belt w

CHECKPOINT

Make this adjustmenLower Housing. (InsRefer to “4.5.4 PrintWith EPSON Stylusof PG setting are avaHowever, make this minimum PG positio(Refer to “4.5.7 APGASF Assy” (p.120) a

Align the triangles w

Page 162: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

A 162

1.2.3.

4.5.

6.7.

8.

9.10.

11.12.

13.

0. PG Adjustment

CP

CA

ing belt to move e

CR Guide Shaft UP

CR Guide Shaft

DOWN

CR Guide Shaft

3mm) placement position

C.B.S.(P4) 3x8 (8±1Kgf.cm)

DJUSTMENT Adjustment without Using Adjustment Program

Adjustment procedure

Specified PG value: 1.2 ± 0.1 mm

Install new ink cartridges in the carriage.Check that the APG Assy and the carriage are in the PG-position. (Fig. 5-9)Move the carriage to the center of the platen, and place 1.1 mm thickness gauge on the left aligning its left edge with the second rib of the Front Paper Guide. And place another 1.1 mm thickness gauge on the right aligning its right edge with the rightmost rib of the Front Paper Guide. (Fig. 5-10)

Pull the Timing Belt to move the carriage to the left end.If the carriage comes in contact with the gauge, adjust the Left Parallelism Bush to raise the carriage to a position where the Printhead does not come in contact with gauge.Pull the Timing Belt to move the carriage to the right end.If the carriage comes in contact with the gauge, adjust the Right Parallelism Bush to raise the carriage to a position where the Printhead does not come in contact with gauge.Move the carriage to the middle area of the platen, and place 1.3 mm thickness gauges at the left and right ends of the platen.Pull the Timing Belt to move the carriage to the left end.If the carriage does not come in contact with the gauge, make the adjustment again.Pull the Timing Belt to move the carriage to the right end.If the carriage does not come in contact with the gauge, make the adjustment again.Mark the indicated graduation position of the right and left Parallelism Bush, and tighten the screws. (Screw tightening torque: 8±1 Kgf•cm)

Figure 5-1

HECKOINT

The thickness gauge must not be set over the leftmost rib on the Front Paper Guide.The thickness gauge must not be set over the rightmost rib on the Front Paper Guide.

UTION The Printhead must come in contact with the 1.3 mm thickness gauges but must not come in contact with the 1.15 mm thickness gauges.

Pull the timthe carriag

CR Guide Shaft UP

CR Guide Shaft

CR Guide Shaft

DOWN

Gauge (1.1 or 1.

Page 163: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

AD 163

5.3

Thithe ban

elt Tension Adjustment

Ste

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1

CD may not change at all even if the belt is , flip the belt again after a few seconds.stment in a quiet place to avoid inaccurate s due to the surrounding noise. results may differ greatly because of ment. In such case, flip the belt again to lts whose values are most close to each e within the range between 1/100 and 5/100,

reliability of measurement results. ± 1.5Nrque of PF Motor: 4 ± 0.5 kgf.cm

MIC of Tension Gauge

Timing Belt

JUSTMENT Adjustment without Using Adjustment Program

.2 PF Belt Tension AdjustmentPurpose:

s adjustment is made to avoid the idling of the PF motor (fatal error), breaking of motor coil caused by an abnormal heat, or lost of paper feed accuracy that causes ding on the printout.

Things to be used

Tension gauge

Tweezers

(+) Phillips screwdriver

Adjustment procedure

Figure 5-12. PF B

Figure 5-11. PF Belt Tension Adjustmentp Procedure Content

Secure the PF Motor to the mechanism, then put the Timing Belt on the PF Roller Unit and the PF Motor Pinion.

Press the “POWER” button. (A channel number (i.e. No. 0 or No.1) appears on the LCD.)

Press the “SELECT” button to select a channel of which settings you want to save from No.0 to No. 9. (The default value is also available.)

Press the “WEIGHT” button. The default value appears. Using the numeric keypad, enter the numbers so that “1.0 g/m” is displayed on the LCD.

Press the “WIDTH” button. The default value appears. Using the numeric keypad, enter the numbers so that “3.0 mm” is displayed on the LCD.

Press the “SPAN” button. The default value appears. Using the numeric keypad, enter the numbers so that “99 mm” is displayed on the LCD.

Bring the microphone to the center of the belt tension as closely as possible.

Note : Keep the microphone away from a position where the belt may hit the microphone in the following procedure.

Press the “MEASURE” button. (“---” appears on the LCD.)

Put the ends of the Tweezers on the Timing Belt, then flip the belt downward. The “---” displayed on the LCD changes to “N” in wave movement notifying the measurement result with beep sound. Regardless to the flipping strength, the jig is capable of measuring sound with a high degree of accuracy.

0 Repeating the steps 8 and 9, adjust the tension by slightly moving the installation part of the PF motor so that the tension falls within the acceptable standard values.

The display on the Lflipped. In this caseCarry out this adjumeasurement resultSome measurementinaccurate measureobtain the two resuother. The errors arwhich ensures highStandard value: 9.3Screw tightening to

Page 164: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

A 164

5.

Thof

elt Tension Adjustment

St

D may not change at all even if the belt is flip the belt again after a few seconds.ment in a quiet place to avoid inaccurate due to the surrounding noise.esults may differ greatly because of ent. In such case, flip the belt again to

s whose values are most close to each within the range between 1/100 and 5/100, eliability of measurement results. 0.2 N.mue of Tensioner: 8 ± 1 kgf.cm

Timing Belt

Tensioner

DJUSTMENT Adjustment without Using Adjustment Program

3.3 FD Belt Tension AdjustmentPurpose:

is adjustment is made to avoid the idling of the ASF motor (fatal error) or breaking the motor coil caused by an abnormal heat.

Things to be used

Tension gauge

Plastic Tweezers

(+) Phillips screwdriver

Printer status: Rear Frame is removed (see P.144)

Adjustment procedure

Figure 5-13. FD B

Table 5-6. FD Belt Tension Adjustmentep Procedure Content

1 Check the FD Timing Belt for its proper installation.

2 Press the “POWER” button. (A channel number (i.e. No. 0 or No.1) appears on the LCD.)

3 Press the “SELECT” button to select a channel of which settings you want to save from No.0 to No. 9. (The default value is also available.)

4

Sets the following parameters:WEIGHT: 1.3 g/mWIDTH: 3.0 mmSPAN: 127 mm

5Bring the microphone to the center of the belt tension as closely as possible.Keep the microphone away from a position where the belt may hit the microphone in the following procedure.

6 Press the “MEASURE” button. (“---” appears on the LCD.)

7

Put the ends of the Tweezers on the Timing Belt, then flip the belt downward. The “---” displayed on the LCD changes to “N” in wave movement notifying the measurement result with beep sound. Regardless to the flipping strength, the jig is capable of measuring sound with a high degree of accuracy.

8 Repeating the steps 8 and 9, adjust the tension by slightly moving the installation part of the Tensioner so that the tension falls within the acceptable standard values.

The display on the LCflipped. In this case, Carry out this adjustmeasurement resultsSome measurement rinaccurate measuremobtain the two resultother. The errors arewhich ensures high rStandard value: 1.0 ±Screw tightening torq

MIC of Tension Gauge

Page 165: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

A 165

5.

1.

2.

ce the original adjustment jig as shown in the

Adjustment Jig Setting Position

meter Set” window, and click [OK].

riginal Adjustment (2)

CA

CP

DJUSTMENT Scanner Original Adjustment

4 Scanner Original AdjustmentThis adjustment must be carried out after;

Replacement of Upper Scanner Housing

Replacement of Scanner Unit

Adjustment procedure

Turn the printer ON.

Run “FT.exe”.

Figure 5-14. Original Adjustment (1)

3. Open the document cover, and plafigure below.

Figure 5-15. Original

4. Select “C686” in the “Select Para

Figure 5-16. O

UTION This adjustment requires the FT (Function Test) program and the exclusive adjustment jig.If the setting of the printer differs from the one mentioned in the following procedure, this adjustment can not be completed correctly. In that case, the edge of the Upper Scanner Housing may be read in during scanning or copying.

HECKOINT

Download and install the EPSON Scan in advance.Before the adjustment is performed, connect the printer to the computer with the adjustment program installed with the USB cable. Original Adjustment Jig

Page 166: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

A 166

5.

6.

lowed by the window shown below.

t is completed successfully>

the adjustment is completed successfully (1)

the adjustment is completed successfully (2)

DJUSTMENT Scanner Original Adjustment

Click the “SGL” icon in the “EPSON Scanner Function Test - WriteZero for service” window.

Figure 5-17. Original Adjustment (3)

Enter the product number in the “Single Test” window, select “Write Zero Correction Value”, and press the [Execute] button.

Figure 5-18. Original Adjustment (4)

7. A progress bar will be displayed fol

<Window displayed when the adjustmen

Figure 5-19. Window displayed when

Figure 5-20. Window displayed when

SGL Icon

Enter the last five digits of the scanner production control number label, put one space, and then enter the last five digits of the printer production control number label.

Execute Button

Select “Write Zero Correction Value”.

Page 167: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

A 167

<W

If tcoraga

DJUSTMENT Scanner Original Adjustment

indow displayed when the adjustment has failed>

Figure 5-21. Window displayed when the adjustment has failed

he adjustment cannot be completed successfully, check whether the parts are rectly installed or not. If there is a problem, perform the part replacement once in.

Page 168: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

A rrection 168

5.Pa

5.Th

e used for scanning the pattern in BRS/PFP ent program, select the scanner to use.

ystem Configuration

CP

CA

ner for BRS/PFP Adjustment

Sensor type Remarks

CCD

CCD

CIS Use the internal scanner.

CIS Use the internal scanner.

CIS Use the internal scanner.

type of the scanner to use for the required after the BRS adjustment differs. For PFP adjustment pattern/PFP

me is not required.

be scanned straight away. (Drying time of ecommended.)

s to be dried more than 5 minutes.

Calculate correction

value

PC Printer

DJUSTMENT Banding Reduction System (BRS) Adjustment / Paper Feed Amount Profile (PFP) Co

5 Banding Reduction System (BRS) Adjustment / per Feed Amount Profile (PFP) Correction

5.1 Overviewis section explains how to carry out BRS/PFP adjustments.

Tools and paper required to perform the adjustment

Specified Scanner to perform the adjustment

The following are the scanners that can badjustment. When starting up the adjustm

Figure 5-22. S

HECKOINT

For overview of BRS/PFP Adjustment, refer to Chapter 2 “2.4 Banding Reduction System (BRS) / Paper Feed Amount Profile Correction (PFP) (p.54)Be sure to have a specified scanner ready beforehand as it is necessary to carry out the adjustment.Before scanning, confirm that the document table is free from any dirt or stain.

Table 5-7. Tools and Paper for BRS/PFP Adjustment

Tools/Paper Product Code

Common PFP Base scale 1453980

BRS Matte Paper-Heavyweight (A4) ---

PFP Premium Glossy Photo Paper (4 x 6) ---

UTION Install the driver of the scanner to the PC in advance. As the profile required for the adjustment is not prepared for scanners other than the ones specified below, BRS/PFP Adjustment can not be carried out by the other scanners.

Table 5-8. Specified Scan

Model Name

Perfection 4990 Photo

Perfection V700 Photo

Stylus Photo RX560/RX580/RX590

Stylus Photo RX585/RX595/RX610

Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690

CHECKPOINT

Depending on the sensoradjustment, drying timepattern has been printedcheck pattern, drying ti

For “CCD” sensor:Printed pattern canabout 2 minutes is rFor “CIS” sensor:Printed pattern need

Test Pattern Scanner

Page 169: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

A rrection 169

Ca

No

yed in the Adjustment program, check the out the adjustment again. If an error ng the points below, change the scanner carry out the adjustment again.er that printed the pattern and the printer tment value is the same.ed pattern is placed on the document table ctly.o gap between the PFP Base Scale and the t.er glass surface and the PFP Base Scale is

r dust.

DJUSTMENT Banding Reduction System (BRS) Adjustment / Paper Feed Amount Profile (PFP) Co

Adjustment Flow

rry out the adjustment following the adjustment flow below.

Figure 5-23. BRS/PFP Adjustment Flow

te*: When a PFP pattern is judged as NG, repeat the steps as described below.First time NG: retry from step Second time NG:retry from stepThird time NG: perform step

BRS Adjustment START

Error?

END *

Judge it is mechanism’s failure. Remove it to

locate the defective part and replace, then

reassemble it.

NG

NG

NG

OK

OK

OK

Printing the BRS Adjustment Pattern

Scanning the BRS Adjustment Pattern

Printing the PFP Adjustment Pattern

Judging theCheck Pattern

PFP Adjustment START

BRS Adjustmentunnecessary?

END

Scanning the BRS Adjustment Pattern

Error?

NG

OK

Printing the PFP Check Pattern

CHECKPOINT

When an error is displapoints below, then carryoccurs even after checkiwith a different one and1. Check that the print

to register the adjus2. Check that the print

of the scanner corre3. Check that there is n

pattern printed shee4. Check that the scann

free from any dirt o

Page 170: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

A rrection 170

5.

5.5

1.2.3.

4.

rn

ase Scale on the document table and click the attern” column.

S calibration values are automatically al flash ROM. If an error occurs, check that le is clean, and the scale/adjustment pattern is

d BRS Adjustment Pattern Positionument glass of the scanner)

CP

ng when setting the PFP Base Scale, and on the scanner. e document glass aligning the scale corner gin position. inted sheet along the scale as shown in the sure to place it parallel to the scale, with

BRS Adjustment Pattern (A4)

Scanner Document Table

DJUSTMENT Banding Reduction System (BRS) Adjustment / Paper Feed Amount Profile (PFP) Co

5.2 Adjustment Procedure

.2.1 BRS (Banding Reduction System) AdjustmentPrinting the BRS Adjustment Pattern

Load A4 size Matte Paper-Heavyweight on the paper support. Select [BRS Adjustment] in the adjustment program.Click the [Print] button on the “1. Print Test Pattern” column to print the adjustment pattern. Let the printed pattern dry for more than 5 minutes if using CIS sensor type scanner.

Figure 5-24. BRS Test Pattern

Scanning the BRS Adjustment Patte

5. Set the printed pattern and the PFP B[Scan] button on the “3. Scan Test P

6. According to the scanned result, BRcalculated and are written to the serithe document table glass and the scanot tilted, then repeat from step 5.

Figure 5-25. PFP Base Scale an(Viewed from the doc

HECKOINT

In the Adjustment program, the identification code is used to distinguish whether the printer that printed the pattern and the printer to register the adjustment value is the same. Make sure to let the printed pattern dry for more than 5 minutes if using CIS sensor type scanner. When using CCD sensor type scanner, the printed pattern does not need to be dried before scanning. Refer to “Table 5-8. Specified Scanner for BRS/PFP Adjustment” (p.168)

Printer Identification Code

CAUTION Be careful of the followithe adjustment pattern

Place the scale on thwith the scanner oriPlace the pattern-prfigure below. Make no gaps.

PFP Base Scale

Scanner Origin Position

Page 171: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

A rrection 171

5.5

1.2.3.

rn

test pattern on the document table and click st Pattern” column.

P calibration values are automatically al flash ROM. If an error occurs, check that le is clean, and the scale/adjustment pattern is

d PFP Adjustment Pattern Positionocument glass of the scanner)

CP

ng when setting the PFP Base Scale and on the scanner. e document glass aligning the scale corner gin position. inted sheet along the scale as shown in the sure to place it parallel to the scale, with

PFP Adjustment Pattern

(4 x 6 size)

Scanner Document Table

DJUSTMENT Banding Reduction System (BRS) Adjustment / Paper Feed Amount Profile (PFP) Co

.2.2 PFP Adjustment Printing the PFP Adjustment Pattern

Load 4 x 6 Premium Glossy Photo Paper on the paper support. Select [PFP Adjustment] in the adjustment program.Click the [Print] button on the “1. Print Test Pattern” column to print the adjustment pattern.

Figure 5-26. PFP Test Pattern

Scanning the PFP Adjustment Patte

4. Set the PFP Base Scale and the PFPthe [Scan] button on the “3. Scan Te

5. According to the scanned result, PFcalculated and are written to the serithe document table glass and the scanot tilted, then repeat from step 4.

Figure 5-27. PFP Base Scale an(When viewed from the d

HECKOINT

In the Adjustment program, the identification code is used to distinguish whether the printer that printed the pattern and the printer to register the adjustment value is the same.

Printer Identification Code

CAUTION Be careful of the followithe adjustment pattern

Place the scale on thwith the scanner oriPlace the pattern-prfigure below. Make no gaps.

PFP Base Scale

Scanner Origin Position

Page 172: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

A rrection 172

6. ere is no white or overlapped bands in all the nd, carry out the steps below. e if the bands appear again. ry the PFP adjustment again from the

he re- adjustment in step 2, determine that it is out check/reassemble of the parts that was

k Pattern Judging Standard

OK bands

Bottom Edge Area Check Pattern

NGite band

NGpped band

DJUSTMENT Banding Reduction System (BRS) Adjustment / Paper Feed Amount Profile (PFP) Co

Printing the PFP Check Pattern

Set 4 x 6 Premium Glossy Photo Paper on the paper support and click the [Print] Button on the “4. Print Check Pattern” column.

Figure 5-28. PFP Check Pattern

Judging the Check Pattern

7. Referring to Fig. 5-29 check that thcheck patterns. If any bands are fou1. Re-print the check pattern to se2. When bands appear in Step 1, t

beginning.3. When bands appear even after t

the mechanism failure and carryremoved/replaced.

Figure 5-29. PFP Chec

Normal Area Check Pattern

Bottom Edge Area Check Pattern

no

Normal Area Check Pattern

wh

overla

Page 173: RX680 Service Manual

C H A P T E R

6MAINTENANCE

Page 174: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

MAINTENANCE Overview 174

6.1 OverviewThis section provides information to maintain the printer in its optimum condition.

6.1.1 CleaningThis printer has no mechanical components which require regular cleaning except the Print Head. Therefore, when returning the printer to the user, check the following parts and perform appropriate cleaning if stain is noticeable.

Exterior partsUse a clean soft cloth moistened with water, and wipe off any dirt. If the exterior parts have ink stain, use a cloth moistened with neutral detergent to wipe it off.

Inside the printerUse a vacuum cleaner to remove any paper dust.

LD Roller/Retard Roller/Idol Roller/Front Retard Roller

When paper loading function does not operate because of a drop in friction force of the LD Roller and the other rollers above due to paper dust, use a soft cloth moistened with alcohol to remove the paper dust.

6.1.2 Service MaintenanceIf any abnormal print (dot missing, white line, etc.) has occurred or the printer indicates the “Maintenance request error”, take the following actions to clear the error. (This error is displayed in EPSON Status Monitor 3 and in the LCD panel.)

6.1.2.1 Print Head cleaningWhen dot missing or banding appears on images, run the Print Head cleaning cycle.* The cleaning be activated from the control panel, the printer driver utility or the Adjustment program.

Note *: This printer has three manual cleaning modes. The appropriate cleaning mode is automatically selected and performed according to various conditions. The ink consumption amount for manual cleaning varies depending on the mode.

6.1.2.2 Maintenance request errorInk is consumed also for cleaning and flashing operations. When the ink is used for cleaning and flashing operations, the ink is drained to the Waste Ink Pads via the Pump. The amount of the waste ink is stored as the waste ink counter into the EEPROM. When the waste ink counter has reached the limit of the absorbing capability of the Waste Ink Pads, the maintenance request error is displayed. This printer takes the ink evaporation amount into consideration, therefore the counter limit differs depending on how often printing is made.

When the maintenance request error appears, replace the Waste ink pads with a new one and reset the waste ink counter using the Adjustment program. If the waste ink counter is close to its limit, recommend that the Waste ink pads will be replaced with new one. This is because the “Maintenance request error” will may occur after returning the repaired product to the customer.

CAUTION Never use chemical solvents, such as thinner, benzine, and acetone to clean the exterior parts of the printer like the Housing. These chemicals may deform or deteriorate the components of the printer.Be careful not to damage any components when you clean inside the printer.Do not scratch the coated surface of the PF Roller Unit. Use soft brush to wipe off any dusts. Use a soft cloth moistened with alcohol to remove the ink stain.Use a soft cloth moistened with alcohol to remove the ink stain.When using compressed air products; such as air duster, for cleaning during repair and maintenance, the use of such products containing flammable gas is prohibited.

CHECKPOINT

For display of Maintenance request error, see the following.Chapter3 "TROUBLESHOOTING" (p.55)

Page 175: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

MAINTENANCE Overview 175

6.1.3 LubricationThe type and amount of the grease used to lubricate the printer parts are determined based on the results of the internal evaluations. Be sure to apply the specified type and amount of the grease to the specified parts during servicing mentioned below.

When parts that need lubrication is been replaced

As the need arises during disassembly/reassembly of the printer

Table 6-1. Specified Lubricant

LUBRICATION OF DRIVEN PULLEY

Figure 6-1. Lubrication of the Driven Pulley (1)

Figure 6-2. Lubrication of the Driven Pulley (2)

CAUTION Never use oil or grease other than those specified in this manual. Use of different types of oil or grease may damage the component and adversely affect the printer operation.Observe the specified amount. Never apply excess.

Type Name EPSON CODE Supplier

Grease G-65 1246432 EPSON

Grease G-71 1304682 EPSON

Grease G-72 1409258 EPSON

Grease G-74 1409257 EPSON

<Lubrication Points>One point at the center of the Pulley Shaft

<Type>G-71

<Application Amount>φ 1 x 1 circle

<Application Timing>Apply before installing the Driven Pulley

<Remarks> Apply with Injector

<Lubrication Points>Two points on bushings for the Pulley Shaft (Inside)

<Type>G-71

<Application Amount>φ 1 x 5 mm x 2 points

<Application Timing>Apply before installing the Driven Pulley

<Remarks> Apply with Injector

Driven Pulley

Driven Pulley Holder

Pulley Shaft

Application Point

Application Point

Driven Pulley Holder

Page 176: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

MAINTENANCE Overview 176

Figure 6-3. Lubrication of the Driven Pulley (3)

Figure 6-4. Lubrication of the Driven Pulley (4)

LUBRICATION OF PAPER GUIDE FRONT&EJ ROLLER ASSY/PF ROLLER ASSY

Figure 6-5. Lubrication of the Paper Guide Front

Figure 6-6. Lubrication of the EJ Roller Shaft (1)

<Lubrication Points>Two points on the side of the Pulley (Outside)

<Type>G-71

<Application Amount>φ 1 x 5 mm x 2 points

<Application Timing>Apply before installing the Driven Pulley

<Remarks> Apply with Injector

<Lubrication Points>Four points where contact with the Main Frame

<Type>G-71

<Application Amount>φ 1 x 2 mm x 4 points

<Application Timing>Apply before installing the Driven Pulley

<Remarks> Apply with Injector

Application Point

Driven Pulley HolderDriven Pulley

Application Point

Application Point

Driven Pulley Holder

<Lubrication Points>Four contact points between the bushing of the Paper Guide Front and EJ Roller Shaft/PF Roller Shaft.

<Type>G-74

<Application Amount>Apply with Brush on the contact points

<Application Timing>Apply before installing the EJ Roller Shaft

<Remarks> Apply with BrushMake sure that the rubber rollers on the EJ Roller are free from grease.

<Lubrication Points>Contact point between the Left Bush and the Main Frame

<Type>G-71

<Application Amount>φ 1 x 1 circle

<Application Timing>Apply before installing the EJ Roller Shaft

<Remarks> Apply with InjectorMake sure that the rubber rollers on the EJ Roller are free from grease.

Paper Guide Front

Application Point

Application Point

EJ Roller ShaftLeft Bush

Application Point

Page 177: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

MAINTENANCE Overview 177

Figure 6-7. Lubrication of the EJ Roller Shaft (2)

Figure 6-8. Lubrication of the PF Roller Assy (1)

Figure 6-9. Lubrication of the PF Roller Assy (2)

LUBRICATION OF CARRIAGE ASSY

Figure 6-10. Lubrication of the Main Frame

<Lubrication Points>Contact point between the EJ Roller Shaft and the EJ Ground Spring

<Type>G-71

<Application Amount>φ 1 x 5mm

<Application Timing>Apply after installing the Paper Guide Front and EJ Roller Assy

<Remarks> Apply with Injector Apply inside the positioning groove for the spring.Make sure that the rubber rollers on the EJ Roller are free from grease.

<Lubrication Points>On the groove for the E-ring (1), and the Compression Spring (2) of the PF Roller Assy.

<Type>G-71

<Application Amount>(1) φ 1 x 5mm (Groove for E-ring)(2) φ 1 x 10mm (Compression Spring)

<Application Timing>Apply before installing the PF Roller Assy

<Remarks> Apply with InjectorMake sure to apply inside the groove for E-ring.Make sure that the coated part of the PF Roller Shaft and PF scale are free from grease.

EJ Roller Shaft

Application Point

PF Scale

Compression Spring PF Roller Shaft

Application Point (1)

Application Point (2)

<Lubrication Points>Contact point between the PF Roller Assy (Left side) and the PF Ground Spring

<Type>G-71

<Application Amount>φ 1 x 5mm

<Application Timing>Apply after installing the PF Roller Assy

<Remarks> Apply with Injector Make sure to apply inside the groove.Make sure that the coated part of the PF Roller Shaft is free from grease.

<Lubrication Points>Two contact points between the Carriage Assy and the rear center of the Main Frame

<Type>G-71

<Application Amount>160 ± 20mg x2

<Application Timing>Apply after installing the Carriage Assy and the CR Shaft

<Remarks> Apply with InjectorDo not apply 40mm each of both sides.Move the Carriage Assy left and right to apply the grease evenly to the whole.

Application Point

PF Roller Shaft

1

2

(1) 5mm from top(2) 10mm from top

Except for 40mm (Both sides)

Application Point

Page 178: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

MAINTENANCE Overview 178

Figure 6-11. Lubrication of the CR Shaft (1)

Figure 6-12. Lubrication of the CR Shaft (2)

Figure 6-13. Lubrication of the CR Shaft (3)

Figure 6-14. Lubrication of the Right PG Cam and the Washer

<Lubrication Points>Two Lubrication holes of the Carriage Assy.

<Type>G-71

<Application Amount> 210 ± 20mg x 2 points

<Application Timing>Apply before installing the Carriage Assy and the CR Shaft

<Remarks> Apply with InjectorApply the amount from the two lubrication holes.Make sure that the Timing Belt is free from grease.

<Lubrication Points>Two contact points between the Carriage Assy and the CR Shaft

<Type>G-71

<Application Amount> 210 ± 20mg x 2 points

<Application Timing>Apply before installing the Carriage Assy and the CR Shaft

<Remarks> Apply with InjectorAfter lubrication, move the CR Shaft to left and right by 60mm while rotating it, to spread the grease evenly.Make sure that the Timing Belt is free from grease.

Carriage Assy

Application Points: Apply from the holes

CR Shaft

Carriage Assy

Application Point

CR Shaft

<Lubrication Points>Contact points between the right bushing for the CR Shaft of the Main Frame (1) and the right end of the CR Shaft (2)

<Type>G-71

<Application Amount>(1) φ 1 x 5mm(2) φ 1 x 5mm

<Application Timing>Apply when installing the CR Shaft

<Remarks> Apply with Injector

<Lubrication Points>Contact points between the Washer and the Main Frame (1), and the Cam surface of the Right PG Cam (2)

<Type>G-71

<Application Amount>(1) φ 1 x half circle (Washer)(2) φ 1 x 1 circle (the Cam surface of the

Right PG Cam)

<Application Timing>Apply when installing the CR Shaft

<Remarks> Apply with InjectorApply grease on the Washer evenly by rotating the CR Shaft.

Application Point (1)

Application Point (2)

CR Shaft

Washer

Right PG Cam Application Point (2)

Application Point (1)

Page 179: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

MAINTENANCE Overview 179

Figure 6-15. Lubrication of the CR Shaft (4)

Figure 6-16. Lubrication of the Left PG Cam

LUBRICATION OF INK SYSTEM

Figure 6-17. Lubrication at the Ink System replacement

LUBRICATION OF CDR GUIDE ASSY

Figure 6-18. Lubrication of the CDR Base L

<Lubrication Points>Contact points between the left bushing for the CR Shaft of the Main Frame (1) and the left end of the CR Shaft (2)

<Type>G-71

<Application Amount>φ 1 x 5 mm x 2 points

<Application Timing>Apply when installing the CR Shaft

<Remarks> Apply with InjectorMake sure that the PF Scale is free from grease.

<Lubrication Points>The Cam surface of the Left PG Cam

<Type>G-71

<Application Amount>φ 1 x 1 circle (the Cam Surface of the Left PG Cam)

<Application Timing>Apply when installing the CR Shaft

<Remarks> Apply with InjectorApply grease evenly by rotating the CR Shaft.

CR Shaft PF Scale

Application Point (2)

Application Point (1)

Application Point

Left PG Cam

<Lubrication Points>On the Main Frame where the clutch gear and spring of the Ink System contact

<Type>G-71

<Application Amount>φ 1 x 1 circle

<Application Timing>Apply before installing the Ink System

<Remarks> Apply with Injector

<Lubrication Points>Around the four bearing dowels of the CDR Base L

<Type>G-71

<Application Amount>φ 1 x 1 circle x 4 points

<Application Timing>Apply before attaching the gears

<Remarks> Apply with Injector

Main Frame

Application Point

CDR Base L

Application Point

Page 180: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

MAINTENANCE Overview 180

Figure 6-19. Lubrication of the CDR Guide Assy (1)

Figure 6-20. Lubrication of the CDR Base R

Figure 6-21. Lubrication of the CDR Guide Assy (2)

LUBRICATION OF PAPER GUIDE LOWER

Figure 6-22. Lubrication of the CDR Link Arm

<Lubrication Points>Around the whole two racks for the gears on both sides of CDR Guide

<Type>G-74

<Application Amount>φ 1 x 1 circle x 2 points

<Application Timing>Before installing the CDR Guide Shaft

<Remarks> Apply with Brush

<Lubrication Points>Around the bearing dowel for the Combination Gear 36,24

<Type>G-71

<Application Amount>φ 1 x 1 circle

<Application Timing>Apply before installing the gears

<Remarks> Apply with Injector

Left side of CDR Guide

Right side of CDR Guide

Application Point

Application Point

CDR Base R

<Lubrication Points>Four contact points between the CDR Base L/R and the EJ Frame

<Type>G-71

<Application Amount>φ 1 x 6mm x 4 points

<Application Timing>Apply after installing the CDR Guide Assy

<Remarks> Apply with InjectorApply on the corners of the bump

<Lubrication Points>Contact points between the CDR Link Arm and the Main Frame

<Type>G-71

<Application Amount>φ 1 x 15mm x 2 points

<Application Timing>Apply before installing the Paper Guide Front & EJ Roller Assy

<Remarks> Apply with Injector

CDR Base L

CDR Base R

Application Point

Back side of CDR Link Arm

Paper Guide Front & EJ Roller Assy

Application Point

Page 181: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

MAINTENANCE Overview 181

LUBRICATION OF PAPER GUIDE BANK ASSY

Figure 6-23. Lubrication of the Paper Guide Bank Assy (1)

Figure 6-24. Lubrication of the Paper Guide Bank Assy (2)

LUBRICATION OF PAPER GUIDE REAR

Figure 6-25. Lubrication of the Paper Guide Rear

LUBRICATION OF REAR ASF ASSY

Figure 6-26. Lubrication of the Rear ASF Assy(1)

<Lubrication Points>Two contact points between the Holder Support and the Front Retard Roller Holder

<Type>G-71

<Application Amount>φ 1 x 5mm x 2 points

<Application Timing>Apply before installing the Front Retard Roller

<Remarks> Apply with InjectorMake sure that the Front Retard Roller is free from grease.

<Lubrication Points>Contact points between the Retard Reset Shaft and its bushings

<Type>G-72

<Application Amount>φ 1 x 5mm x 8 points

<Application Timing>Apply before installing the Retard Reset Shaft

<Remarks> Apply with Injector

Front Retard Roller

Application Point

Paper Guide Bank Assy

Application Point

<Lubrication Points>Five contact points to the shaft of the Paper Guide Rear

<Type>G-71

<Application Amount>φ 1 x 5mm x 5points

<Application Timing>Apply before installing the Paper Guide Rear

<Remarks> Apply with Injector

<Lubrication Points>Two contact points between the Change Slider and the Main Frame

<Type>G-71

<Application Amount>φ 1 x 5mm x 2 points (Left/Right)

<Application Timing>Apply before installing the Change Slider

<Remarks> Apply with InjectorAfter installation, move the Change slider left and right to check that it moves smoothly.

Paper Guide Rear (Bottom)

Application Point

Change Slider

Application Point

Page 182: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

MAINTENANCE Overview 182

Figure 6-27. Lubrication of the Hopper Cam

LUBRICATION OF PAPER GUIDE UPPER L/R

Figure 6-28. Lubrication of the Paper Guide Upper L/R

<Lubrication Points>Cam surface of the Hopper Cam

<Type>G-71

<Application Amount>φ 1 x 1 circle (Cam surface of the Hopper Cam)

<Application Timing>Apply before installing the Hopper

<Remarks> Apply with Injector

LD Roller

Hopper Cam Rear ASF Assy

Application Point <Lubrication Points>

All over the four Paper Guide Flaps

<Type>G-74

<Application Amount>Apply the grease all over the Paper Guide Flaps.

<Application Timing>Apply before installing the Paper Guide Upper L/R

<Remarks> Fill a container with the G-74 grease in advance, and follow the procedure below to apply the grease to the Paper Guide Flaps.1. Remove the Paper Guide Flaps from

the Paper Guide Upper L/R and put the flaps into the container to soak them in the G-74. Use tweezers to completely soak them into the grease.

2. Take out the Paper Guide Flaps from the container and let them dry completely.

3. Attach the Paper Guide Flaps to the Paper Guide Upper L/R.

Paper GuideUpper L

Paper Guise Flap (x4)Application

Point

Paper GuideUpper R

Page 183: RX680 Service Manual

C H A P T E R

7APPENDIX

Page 184: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

A 184

7.Seeeac

7-1. Block Diagram

C

C

MAIN Duplex Unit sensor

C685STG

85PNL-B C685PSB

Cover Opensensor

CDR modesensor

PF Encoder

PF Motor

RP sensor

FP sensor

APG sensor

RH sensor

PE sensor

ASF Encoder

CR Motor

ASF Motor

ASF SubMotor

Card Slot

Card Slot

MS/SD/xD/MMC

CF

USB Host

USB 2.0

AC inCN2

CN5

CN16

CN11

CN12

CN17

CN13

CN14

CN1

CN2 CN1

CN2

CN1

Sub

Board

CN1

CN3

CN4

CN5

CN10

CN11

CN7

CN8

CN9

CN6

CN13

PPENDIX Connectors

1 Connectors the following tables for the connector summary for the Main board, Sub Board and h connectors pin alignment.

Main Board

Sub Board

Figure

N No. Color Connected to PinsCN1 Silver USB I/F 4pin CN2 FFC Storage Board 15pinCN3 FFC LCD Assy 11pinCN4 FFC Panel Unit 8pinCN5 White PS Assy 5pinCN6 FFC Print Head 13pinCN7 FFC Print Head 13pinCN8 FFC Print Head 9pinCN9 FFC CSIC Assy (Head Board) 13pin

CN10 FFC CR Encoder/ PW Sensor 6pinCN11 FFC Sub Board (CN2: Sensor Relay) 14pinCN12 FFC PF Encoder 4pinCN13 Black CDR Mode Sensor 2pinCN14 White Cover Open Sensor 2pinCN16 White Sub Board (CN1: Motor Relay) 6pinCN17 White PF Motor 2pinCN18 Yellow CR Motor (SCN) 2pinCN19 FFC CIS Unit (SCN) 12pinCN20 White CR Encoder (SCN) 4pin

N No. Color Connected to PinsCN1 White Main Board (CN6: Motor Relay) 6pinCN2 FFC Main Board (CN11: Sensor Relay) 14pinCN3 Black ASF Sub Motor 2pinCN4 White CR Motor 2pinCN5 Red ASF Motor 2pinCN6 White RP Sensor 3pinCN7 Black RH Sensor 3pinCN8 Yellow APG Phase Sensor 3pinCN9 Red Front ASF Retard HP Sensor 3pin

CN10 Black ASF Encoder 4pinCN11 White PE Sensor 3pinCN13 Yellow Duplex Unit Sensor 2pin

C686

CIS Unit

C685PNLLCD C6

SCN CR Encoder

Printhead

CSIC

PW Sensor CR Encoder

SCN CR Motor

Y B LC LM M C

Cariage Assy

Scanner Unit

CN1 CN1

CN3 CN4

CN8

CN7

CN6

CN10CN1CN1

CN9

CN19

CN20

CN18

Page 185: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

A 185

CN9)

Board: CN10)

CH_AVDDGNDVHV

Signal NameSDA1COOCSCKGNDCRSTCVDDCH_AENABLEVDDGNDCOMGNDVHV

Signal NameENCAEVDDENCBGNDPWLEDON

Signal NameA (+)B (-)

PPENDIX Connectors

Head FFC

Head Board (Main Board: CN6, CN7, CN8)

CSIC Board (Main Board:

CR Encoder Board (Main

PF Motor (Main Board: CN17)

CN6Pin No. Signal Name

1 COMA_12 GND2_23 COMA_34 GND2_15 COMB_26 GND2_37 GND8 SI19 GND10 SI211 GND12 SI313 TH

CN7Pin No. Signal Name

1 GND2_12 COMA_23 GNC2_34 COMB_15 GND2_26 COMB_37 GND8 VDD29 CH_B10 GND11 SCK12 GND13 XHOT

CN8Pin No. Signal Name

1 GND2 LAT3 GND4 NCHG5 GND

6789

Pin No.123456789

10111213

Pin No.123456

Pin No.12

Page 186: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

A 186

ub Board: CN6)

b Board: CN7)

d: CN13)

: CN13)

rd: CN14)

2)

Signal NameSIGGNDVCC

Signal NameSIGGNDVCC

Signal NameMOD_SIGGND

Signal NameSIGGND

Signal NameSIGGND

Signal NameGNDChAVCCChB

PPENDIX Connectors

CR Motor (Sub Board: CN4)

ASF Motor (Sub Board: CN5)

ASF Sub Motor (Sub Board: CN3)

PE Sensor (Sub Board: CN11)

APG Phase Sensor (Sub Board: CN8)

Front ASF Retard HP (FP) Sensor (Sub Board: CN9)

Rear ASF Phase (RP) Sensor (S

Rear ASF HP (RH) Sensor (Su

CDR Mode Sensor (Main Boar

Duplex Unit Sensor (Sub Board

Cover Open Sensor (Main Boa

PF Encoder (Main Board: CN1

Pin No. Signal Name1 A (+)2 B (-)

Pin No. Signal Name1 A (+)2 B (-)

Pin No. Signal Name1 A (+)2 B (-)

Pin No. Signal Name1 SIG2 GND3 VCC

Pin No. Signal Name1 SIG2 GND3 VCC

Pin No. Signal Name1 SIG2 GND3 VCC

Pin No.123

Pin No.123

Pin No.12

Pin No.12

Pin No.12

Pin No.1234

Page 187: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

A 187

19)

oard: CN20)

rd: CN18)

RP Sensor SIGRH Sensor SIGDuplex Unit Sensor SIG

Signal Name0SVADGNDMCKRES1TRGNDVDDLED RLED GLED BLCDCA

Signal NameGNDChAVccChB

Signal NameSCN_BSCN_A

Signal Name

PPENDIX Connectors

ASF Encoder (Sub Board: CN10)

PS Connector (Main Board: CN5)

Relay Cable

Motor Relay Cable (Main Board: CN16/ Sub Board: CN1)

Sensor Relay Cable (Main Board: CN11/ Sub Board: CN2)

Scanner

CIS Unit (Main Board: CN

SCN CR Encoder (Main B

SCN CR Motor (Main Boa

Pin No. Signal Name1 GND2 ChA3 VCC4 ChB

Pin No. Signal Name1 +42V2 +42V_EX3 PSC4 GND5 GND

Pin No. Signal Name1 ASF-SUB(+)2 ASF-SUB(-)3 CR(+)4 CR(-)5 ASF(+)6 ASF(-)

Pin No. Signal Name1 ASF_ENCB2 +3.3V3 ASF_ENCA4 +3.3V5 PE Sensor SIG6 GND7 GND8 GND9 RH Sensor SIG10 APG Phase Sensor SIG

111214

Pin No.123456789

101112

Pin No.1234

Pin No.12

Pin No.

Page 188: RX680 Service Manual

EPSON Stylus Photo RX680/RX685/RX690 Revision B

A 188

7.

PPENDIX Exploded Diagram / Parts List

2 Exploded Diagram / Parts List

Page 189: RX680 Service Manual

are available.Only numbered Service Parts

Rev.02 C686-ACCE-042PM-A940, EPSON STYLUS PHOTO RX680, 685, 690 No.1

04

01

(Only for EUL/ESP/EHK)

(Only for EUL)07

Page 190: RX680 Service Manual

are available.Only numbered Service Parts

Rev.02 C686-CASE-012PM-A940, EPSON STYLUS PHOTO RX680, 685, 690 No.2

(only for EHC)

118

146

120119

121

133

132

130

144

101

102

131

127

129

129

128

141

143 145

142

124

115

153

151

148

113

116

114

150

149

136

105

140 137108

109

106

135

134

103

(For EHC,EUL, EDG/EFS, EIS/EIB)

Page 191: RX680 Service Manual

are available.Only numbered Service Parts

Rev.01 C686-MECH-011PM-A940, EPSON STYLUS PHOTO RX680, 685, 690 No.4

502507

516

533

509

556

562

540

517

535

554

515

520

534

559

529

514

512

513

560

561

537

538

555

506

505

564

564565

565

565

564

564565

511

531

530

528

527

518

549

500

Page 192: RX680 Service Manual

are available.Only numbered Service Parts

Rev.01 C686-MECH-021PM-A940, EPSON STYLUS PHOTO RX680, 685, 690 No.5

542

541

543

544

510

501503

558

545 539

504

536

553

552

563

563

526

525

551

550

557

557

Page 193: RX680 Service Manual

are available.Only numbered Service Parts

Rev.01 C686-MECH-031PM-A940, EPSON STYLUS PHOTO RX680, 685, 690 No.6

548

547

714

713

713

713

546

546

715

712

710

706

707

708

704

703

702

701

709705

705

705

716

713

711

700

Page 194: RX680 Service Manual

are available.Only numbered Service Parts

Rev.01 C686-MECH-041PM-A940, EPSON STYLUS PHOTO RX680, 685, 690 No.7

814

810

811

808

812

805

804

807

807

806

806

820

803

152

802

800

Page 195: RX680 Service Manual

Part Code Part Name Ref No. Category Qty Remark

1474014 TRAY,CDR ASSY;ESL 1 Accessories 12080469 POWER CABLE 4 Accessories 11475121 LABEL,SUB SHEET;B 7 Accessories 11443530 INK CART.UNBOXED,BK‐SS,DYE;H62F,EC,AS NON FIG Accessories 11443531 INK CART.UNBOXED,C‐SS,DYE;H62F,EC,AS NON FIG Accessories 11443532 INK CART.UNBOXED,M‐SS,DYE;H62F,EC,AS NON FIG Accessories 11443533 INK CART.UNBOXED,Y‐SS,DYE;H62F,EC,AS NON FIG Accessories 11443534 INK CART.UNBOXED,LC‐SS,DYE;H62F,EC,AS NON FIG Accessories 11443535 INK CART.UNBOXED,LM‐SS,DYE;H62F,EC,AS NON FIG Accessories 13102833 SOFTWARE CD,E/F/G/D NON FIG Accessories 14110171 SETTING UP MANUAL NON FIG Accessories 14110172 USER'S GUIDE NON FIG Accessories 11472720 STACKER ASSY;ASP 101 Case 11472719 HOUSING LOWER ASSY;ASP 102 Case 11472717 HOUSING MIDDLE ASSY ;ASP 103 Case 11472713 CASETTE ASSY;ASP 105 Case 11472721 PAPER SUPPORT ASSY;ASP 106 Case 11464428 HINGE ASSY.,LEFT 108 Case 11464429 HINGE ASSY.,RIGHT 109 Case 11464876 BUTTON,STOP 113 Case 11464895 BUTTON,MODE 114 Case 11464896 OPTICAL TUBE,PANEL,MODE 115 Case 11466491 COVER,PANEL,MODE;B 116 Case 11464879 BUTTON,OK 118 Case 11464878 BUTTON,SELECT 119 Case 11464875 BUTTON,START 120 Case 11464873 BUTTON,PS 121 Case 11464889 HOUSING PANEL 124 Case 11464889 HOUSING,PANEL 124 Case 11439629 TORSION SPRING,COVER,SLOT 130 Case 11439628 COVER,SLOT 131 Case 11471493 COVER,PANEL,LEFT;C 132 Case 11471487 COVER,PANEL,RIGHT;C 133 Case 11466089 COVER,INK TUBE;B 134 Case 11466090 COVER,REAR;B 135 Case 11261514 OPTICAL TUBE,PC SLOT 136 Case 11437454 COVER,ASF 137 Case 11474977 LCD MODULE ASSY,C;ASP 140 Case 12090717 LEAF SENSOR 142 Case 12110623 HARNESS,DETECTOR,SCANNER 143 Case 11466085 HOUSING,UPPER;B 144 Case 11448952 LABEL,ACCESSORY;B 145 Case 11464877 BUTTON,SETUP 146 Case 11464886 COVER,CABLE 149 Case 11464887 COVER,CABLE.SUPPORT 150 Case 11464881 OPTICAL TUBE,PANEL,PS 151 Case 11303649 LOGO PLATE,7.36X29;B 152 Case 11474015 COVER CASSETTE,ESL 153 Case 11472741 COVER DOCUMENT ASSY;B ASP 802 Case 12120330 BOARD ASSY.,MAIN 200 Electronic Parts 12110769 HARNESS 201 Electronic Parts 12118700 BOARD ASSY.,STORAGE 202 Electronic Parts 11472725 P/S ASSY;ASP 300 Electronic Parts 12116416 BOARD ASSY.,PANEL 350 Electronic Parts 12110767 HARNESS 351 Electronic Parts 11439150 EDGE GUIDE,CASSETTE,LEFT 127 Mechanism Parts 11439151 EDGE GUIDE,CASSETTE,FRONT 128 Mechanism Parts 11442814 CORK,CASSETTE 129 Mechanism Parts 21439123 COVER,CASSETTE,FRONT 141 Mechanism Parts 12120776 PRINTER MECHANISM,ASP M‐AX12‐101 500 Mechanism Parts 11451595 PAPER GUIDE BANK ASSY;ASP 501 Mechanism Parts 11472714 I/S ASSY;ASP 502 Mechanism Parts 11472729 CD‐R GUIDE ASSY;ASP 503 Mechanism Parts 11472708 PAPER GUIDE REAR ASSY;ASP 504 Mechanism Parts 11451600 PAPER GUIDE UPPER RIGHT ASSY;ASP 505 Mechanism Parts 1

Page 196: RX680 Service Manual

1451601 PAPER GUIDE UPPER LEFT ASSY;ASP 506 Mechanism Parts 11472712 CARRIAGE ASSY;ASP 507 Mechanism Parts 11474966 APG ASSY;ASP 509 Mechanism Parts 11472728 COVER FRONT ASF ASSY;ASP 510 Mechanism Parts 11456088 ROLLER PF ASSY;ASP 511 Mechanism Parts 12110633 CABLE,ENCODER,PF 512 Mechanism Parts 11438992 BOARD ASSY.,ENCODER,PF 513 Mechanism Parts 11438991 MOTOR,ASSY.,PF 514 Mechanism Parts 11214678 CLEANER,HEAD,ASP 515 Mechanism Parts 11438949 TIMING BELT,CR 516 Mechanism Parts 12117166 CABLE,HEAD 517 Mechanism Parts 11438941 HINGE,COVER,CARTRIDGE 518 Mechanism Parts 12117176 MOTOR ASSY.,CR 520 Mechanism Parts 11438942 COVER,CABLE,HEAD 525 Mechanism Parts 11438943 COVER,CABLE,HEAD,INNER 526 Mechanism Parts 11409999 SCALE,CR 527 Mechanism Parts 11410045 EXTENSION SPRING,6.678 528 Mechanism Parts 11451915 COVER CARTRIDGE ASSY;ASP 529 Mechanism Parts 11465942 POROUS PAD,PAPER GUIDE,LEFT 530 Mechanism Parts 1 Both new & old parts supply(1439004/1465942)1465941 POROUS PAD,PAPER GUIDE,RIGHT 531 Mechanism Parts 1 Both new & old parts supply(1439003/1465941)1465943 POROUS PAD,PAPER GUIDE FRONT,UPPER;C 533 Mechanism Parts 1 Both new & old parts supply(1461100/1465943)1465945 POROUS PAD,PAPER GUIDE FRONT,FL,LOWER;B 534 Mechanism Parts 11454280 POR PAD,PA GUI FRON,FL,UPPER;ESL;ASP 535 Mechanism Parts 11452512 SHEET,SHIELD,FRAME,MEIN 536 Mechanism Parts 11438936 BOARD ASSY.,RELAY 537 Mechanism Parts 11475581 SCALE MOTOR ASSY ASF,B ASP 538 Mechanism Parts 12117173 HARNESS,DETECTOR,PE 539 Mechanism Parts 11472716 CSIC SUB ASSY;ASP 540 Mechanism Parts 11480887 CD‐R BASE RIGHT ASSY;ESL,ASP 541 Mechanism Parts 11482710 CD‐R BASE LEFT ASSY ;ASP 542 Mechanism Parts 11482710 CD R BASE LEFT ASSY ;ASP 542 Mechanism Parts 11439045 LEVER,LINK,EJ,RIGHT 543 Mechanism Parts 11439046 LEVER,LINK,EJ,LEFT 544 Mechanism Parts 11439120 DETECTOR,PE 545 Mechanism Parts 12090532 PHOTO INTERUPTER,TLP1243(C8) 546 Mechanism Parts 22110654 HARNESS,DETECTOR,RASF,FRONT 547 Mechanism Parts 12110655 HARNESS,DETECTOR,RASF,REAR 548 Mechanism Parts 12113568 CONNECTOR,CSIC;E 549 Mechanism Parts 62020393 DETECTOR,LEAF,B2 550 Mechanism Parts 12119835 HARNESS,DETECTOR,GUIDE,CDR 551 Mechanism Parts 12110657 HARNESS,DETECTOR,RETARD 552 Mechanism Parts 12111057 HARNESS,DETECTOR,DUPLEX 553 Mechanism Parts 12110630 HARNESS,DETECTOR,APG 554 Mechanism Parts 12110954 HARNESS,ENCODER,ASF 555 Mechanism Parts 12110996 BOARD ASSY.,ENCORDER,SC;B 556 Mechanism Parts 11439051 SPUR GEAR,24 557 Mechanism Parts 21452832 SHEET,SHIELD,FRAME,MEIN;B 558 Mechanism Parts 11438988 TIMING BELT,PF 559 Mechanism Parts 12110625 CABLE,RELAY,SENSOR 560 Mechanism Parts 12117168 HARNESS,RELAY,MOTOR 561 Mechanism Parts 11472711 PAPER GUIDE FRONT AND EJ ASSY;ESL;ASP 562 Mechanism Parts 11439058 EXTENSION SPRING,2.51 563 Mechanism Parts 21479553 FLAP,PAPER,GUIDE 564 Mechanism Parts 41449288 TORSION SPRING,FLAP 565 Mechanism Parts 4F180000 PRINT HEAD 700 Mechanism Parts 11438501 POROUS PAD,INK EJECT,LOWER,FRONT 701 Mechanism Parts 11438502 POROUS PAD,INK EJECT,MIDDLE,FRONT 702 Mechanism Parts 11438503 POROUS PAD,INK EJECT,UPPER,FRONT 703 Mechanism Parts 11438504 POROUS PAD,INK EJECT,TOP,FRONT 704 Mechanism Parts 11438505 POROUS PAD,INK EJECT,FB 705 Mechanism Parts 31449289 POROUS PAD,INK EJECT,UPPER,LEFT 706 Mechanism Parts 11449290 POROUS PAD,INK EJECT,UPPER,RIGHT 707 Mechanism Parts 11449291 POROUS PAD,INK EJECT,MIDDLE,REAR 708 Mechanism Parts 11449292 POROUS PAD,INK EJECT,,LOWER,REAR 709 Mechanism Parts 11449720 POROUS PAD,INK EJECT,TOP,REAR 710 Mechanism Parts 11410007 POROUS PAD,INK,STOPPER 711 Mechanism Parts 11472709 REAR ASF ASSY;ASP 712 Mechanism Parts 1

Page 197: RX680 Service Manual

1439085 LEVER,CHANGE 714 Mechanism Parts 11261624 ROLLER,RETARD 715 Mechanism Parts 11439110 ROLLER,LD 716 Mechanism Parts 11472744 SCANNER UNIT;B ASP 800 Mechanism Parts 11472739 HOUSING UPPER,SCANNER ASP 803 Mechanism Parts 12116643 CIS 804 Mechanism Parts 11461367 CARRIAGE,CIS 805 Mechanism Parts 11279547 SPACER,CIS,A17 806 Mechanism Parts 21279548 SPACER,CIS,B19 806 Mechanism Parts 21279549 SPACER,CIS,C21 806 Mechanism Parts 21279546 SPRING,CIS 807 Mechanism Parts 22116652 CABLE,CIS 808 Mechanism Parts 11463650 TIMING BELT,SC 810 Mechanism Parts 12116660 GROUNDING CABLE,SC 811 Mechanism Parts 12116659 HARNESS,ENCODER,SC 812 Mechanism Parts 11461369 HOUSING,LOWER,SC 814 Mechanism Parts 11472738 MOTOR ASSY,SCANNER ASP 820 Mechanism Parts 1

Part Code Part Name Ref No. Category Qty Remark

Page 198: RX680 Service Manual

Model : PM-A940 StylusBoard : C686 MAIN (BOARD ASSEMBLY MAIN )Rev. : BSheet : 1/5

RX680/685/690 Photo

Page 199: RX680 Service Manual

Model : PM-A940 StylusBoard : C686 MAIN (BOARD ASSEMBLY MAIN )Rev. : BSheet : 2/5

RX680/685/690 Photo

Page 200: RX680 Service Manual

Model : PM-A940 StylusBoard : C686 MAIN (BOARD ASSEMBLY MAIN )Rev. : BSheet : 3/5

RX680/685/690 Photo

Page 201: RX680 Service Manual

Model : PM-A940 StylusBoard : C686 MAIN (BOARD ASSEMBLY MAIN )Rev. : BSheet : 4/5

RX680/685/690 Photo

Page 202: RX680 Service Manual

Model : PM-A940 StylusBoard : C686 MAIN (BOARD ASSEMBLY MAIN )Rev. : BSheet : 5/5

RX680/685/690 Photo

Page 203: RX680 Service Manual

Model : PM-A940 StylusBoard : C685 PANEL (BOARD ASSEMBLY PANEL )Rev. : BSheet : 1/1

RX680/685/690 Photo

Page 204: RX680 Service Manual

Model : PM-A940 StylusBoard : C685 PANEL-B (BOARD ASSEMBLY PANEL-B )Rev. : BSheet : 1/1

RX680/685/690 Photo

Page 205: RX680 Service Manual

Model : PM-A940 StylusBoard : C685 PSB (BOARD ASSEMBLY PSB )Rev. : CSheet : 1/1

RX680/685/690 Photo

Page 206: RX680 Service Manual

Model : PM-A940 StylusBoard : C685 PSE (BOARD ASSEMBLY PSE )Rev. : CSheet : 1/1

RX680/685/690 Photo

Page 207: RX680 Service Manual

Model : PM-A940 StylusBoard : C685 STG (BOARD ASSEMBLY STG )Rev. : CSheet : 1/1

RX680/685/690 Photo